人教版九年级全一册英语知识点归纳,精品3套

人教版九年级全一册英语知识点归纳,精品3套

人教版九年级全一册英语知识点归纳,精品3套 人教版初三英语上册知识点总结 九年级英语Unit 7 ‎ ‎1.  tired 累的        tiring 令人疲惫的 ‎    bored 讨厌       boring 令人厌烦/讨厌的 ‎    excited 兴奋的    exciting 令人兴奋/激动的 ‎    amazed 惊讶的    amazing 令人惊讶的 ‎2. education n. 教育  educational 有教育意义的 ‎3. 想要做…：would like to do   想要…：would like sth. ‎ ‎   常用的句型有：‎ ‎   What would you like to do? 你想要做什么？‎ ‎   I would like to visit GuiLin. 我想去参观桂林。‎ ‎   What would you like ?  你想要什么？‎ I would like some tea. 我想来些茶。‎ Would you like to go to my party? 你来不来参加我的晚会？(表邀请) Yes, I’d love/ like to . No, thanks.‎ Would you like some tea or coffee? 你是要点茶还是咖啡？‎ Yes, I’d love/ like. No. thanks.‎ Where would you like to visit/ go? 你想去哪呢？(本单元的重点句型)‎ ‎4.  go on vacation 去度假 ‎    go on a trip 去旅行    go on a picnic 去野炊 ‎5.  hope to do 希望做某事 I hope to go to Beijing. 我希望去北京。‎ ‎   hope (that) + 从句  希望….‎ I hope that I can go to Beijing.我希望我能去北京。‎ ‎      I hope (that) she can pass the test.我希望她能通过考试。‎ ‎6. I love places where the people are friendly. 我喜欢人们友好的地方。‎ ‎ where 关系副词，引导定语从句 ‎ where引导定语从句修饰表示地点的先行词如：the place, the city等 ‎   That is the school where I studied 10 years ago. ‎ 那就是我10年前所就读的学校。‎ ‎7. 不定代词   参看课本P141 ‎ ‎   注：形容词必须放在不定代词、不定副词的后面 ‎8. consider doing考虑做某事 ‎  I am considering changing my job. 我正在考虑换工作。‎ ‎9. cost (sb.) 钱、时间  The book cost me 10 yuan 这本书花了我10元。‎ ‎10. in general 一般来说， 大体上， 通常 ‎11. be supposed to do 应该做…. === should  如：‎ ‎   Scientists are supposed to know a lot.‎ ‎ 科学家们应该知道更多。‎ ‎12. take a trip 去旅行 ‎13. provide sb. with sth 供应某人某物=== provide sth for sb. ‎ ‎   如：They provide us with water.‎ ‎       They provide water for us.‎ ‎14.  how far 问路程　多远 ‎     how old 问年龄　多少岁 ‎     how long 问时间　多久　多长 ‎     how often 问频率　多久一次 ‎15. be away 离开　如：　　I was away 2days ago. 我两天前离开了。‎ ‎    I will be away for a few days.　我将离开一些天。‎ ‎16. inexpensive  adj. 不贵的  反义词　expensive adj. 贵的 ‎17.　 let sb. do 让某人做某事　Let me help you.让我帮你吧。‎ ‎　　　let sb. not do 让某人不要做某Let us not laugh. 让我们不要笑了。‎ ‎18. in the future 将来　‎ She will a good mother in the future. 在将来她将会是一个好妈妈。‎ ‎19. 用to 表示　“的”有： ‎ answers to question 问题的答案　 the key to the door ‎ 这扇门的钥匙 ‎20. as soon as possible 尽可能的快 ‎21. continue doing == go on doing 继续做某事　如：‎ ‎   She continued singing. == She went on singing. 她继续唱歌。‎ ‎22. according to 根据 ‎ ‎23. be willing to do 愿意做某事 如： ‎ ‎    I am willing to help you. 我愿意帮你。‎ ‎24. on the other hands 另一方面 ‎25. hold on to sth. 保持，不要放弃 ‎ ‎   Please hold on to my hand. 不要放开我的手。‎ ‎26. come true 实现 如：   My dream have come true. 我的梦实现了。‎ 九年级英语Unit 8‎ 短语动词小结 常见短语动词结构有下面几种：‎ ‎1.动词+副词 如：give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜 ‎ 这种结构有时相当于及物动词，如果其宾语是代词，就必须放在动 词和副词之间，如果是名词，则既可插在动词和副词之间，也可放 在短语动词后。‎ ‎2. 动词+介词 如：listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于 ‎   这种结构相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语。‎ ‎3. 动词+副词+介词 如：come up with 提出，想出   run out of ‎ 用完，耗尽 ‎  4. 动词+名词(介词) 如：take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住 ‎1.cheer (sb.) up  使(某人)高兴、振作 如：cheer me up 使我高兴 ‎  clean up  打扫   clean-up n. 打扫 ‎ ‎2. homeless adj. 无家可归的  a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩 ‎  home  n. 家 ‎ ‎3. hand out  分发  hand out bananas ‎ ‎  give out 分发    give out sth to sb. 分….给某人 ‎  give up doing 放弃…  give up smoking 放弃吸烟 ‎  give away 赠送 捐赠  give away sth. to …. give away money to kids ‎ ‎  give sb. sth. 给某人某东西  give me money 给我钱 ‎  give sth. to sb. 给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线 ‎4. sick  adj. 生病的  作表语、定语 ‎ ‎  ill  adj. 生病的    作表语，不能作定语 ‎5. volunteer to do  v. 志愿效劳、主动贡献  ‎ ‎  volunteer  n. 志愿者 ‎ ‎6. come up with  提出 想出 === think up 想出 ‎  catch up with  赶上 追上 ‎7. put off doing 推迟做某事  put on  穿上 (指过程)  put ‎ up  张贴 ‎8. write down 写下  记下 ‎ ‎9. call up 打电话  make a telephone call 打电话 ‎10. set up 成立 建立 ‎ The new hospital was set up in 2000. 这座医院是在2000年成立的。‎ ‎11. each 每个 各自的 强调第一个人或事物的个别情况 常与of 连用 ‎   every 每个 每一个的 一切的 则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用 ‎12. put …to use 把… 投入使用，利用 ‎   They put the new machine to use. 他们把新机器投入使用 ‎13. help sb. (to) do 帮助某人做某事 help him (to) study ‎   help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做某事 help him with English ‎   help do  帮助做某事  help study ‎ ‎14. plan to do 计划做某事         plan + 从句 ‎   I plan to go to Beijing. === I plan (that) I will go to Beijing. 我计划去北京。‎ ‎15. spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing. ‎ 我花了一天的时间去参观北京。‎ ‎   spend… on sth.  花费…在… I spent 3 years on ‎ English. ‎ ‎16.not only … but (also) … 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分 ‎ ‎  (1)引导以 not only …but (also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。‎ 因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but (also)…. 是倒装句。也是说得要 把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如：‎ ‎    ①Not only can I do it but (also) I can do best. ‎ 我不仅能做到而且做得最好。‎ ‎  ⑵Not only…but (also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和数的变化 也就是就近原则 如：‎ ‎  ①Not only Lily but (also) you like cat. 不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。‎ ‎  ②Not only you but (also) Lily likes cat. 不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。‎ 常见的就近原则的结构有：‎ ‎     Neither… nor…即不…也不… (两者都不)‎ Neither you nor I like him. 我和你都不喜欢他。‎ ‎     Either… or… 不是…就是… (两者中的一个)‎ ‎         Either Lily or you are a student. ‎ ‎     Not only …but (also)…‎ ‎     There be ‎ ‎17. join 参加 (指参加团体、组织)  如：join the Party 入党 ‎   take part in 参加 (指参加活动)  如：‎ take part in sports meeting 参加运动会 ‎18. ①run out of == use up 用完 用尽 ‎ I have run out of money.== I have used up money. 我已经用完了钱。‎ ‎   ②run away 逃跑  The monkey has run away from the zoo.‎ 这只猴子已经从动物园里逃跑了。‎ ‎   ③run to + 地方 跑到某地  ‎ ‎19.  take after (在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像 ‎     be similar to 与..相像 ‎     take after 相像     look after 照顾     take care of 照顾 ‎20. work out   算出   结局 ‎    The situation worked out quite well. 情况的结局非常好 ‎   Have you worked out this math problem? 你已经算出这道数学问题了吗？‎ ‎21. hang out 闲荡 闲逛 ‎ ‎   I like to hang out at mall with my friends. 我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。‎ ‎22. be able to do 能 会    be unable to do 不能 不会 ‎ ‎23. thank you for doing 谢谢做某事 如：     thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我 ‎24. for sure  确实如此，毫无疑问 ‎    You don’t have money. That’s for sure. 你没有钱，这是毫无疑问的。‎ ‎25. fill… with… 使…充满…  用…填充…‎ ‎    She filled the bowl with water. 她用水填满碗。‎ ‎26. like  prep. 像… ‎ ‎27. help sb. out 帮助…做事，解决难题(摆脱困境)‎ ‎   I can’t work out this math problem. Please help me out. ‎ 我不能算出这道数学问题，请你帮我解决。‎ ‎28. train n. 火车 ‎   train v. 训练 ‎   train sb. to do. 训练某人做某事 ‎   She trains her dog to fetch things. 她训练她的狗去取东西。‎ ‎29. at once == right away 立刻 马上 如：   Do it at once. 马上去做。‎ ‎   I’ll go there at once/ right away. 我马上去那里。‎ ‎30. one day 有一天 (指将来/过去)‎ ‎   some day 有一天(指将来) 如：    One day I went to Beijing. 有一天我去了北京。‎ ‎    Some day I’ll go to Beijing. 有一天我将去北京。‎ ‎31. specially adv. 特意地 专门地 特别地   special adj. 特别的 ‎32. donation n. 捐赠物    donate v. 捐赠 赠送 ‎33. part of speech  词性 词类 ‎34. disabled adj. 肢体有残疾的   disable v. 不能 九年级英语 Unit9‎ ‎1. 被动语态 ‎ ‎(1). 被动语态表示句子的主语是谓语动词所表示的动作承受者。‎ ‎   (2). 被动语态基本结构：be+及物动词的过去分词 ‎(如果是不用物动词，其过去分词应带有相应的介词)‎ ‎   (3). 被动语态中的be 是助动词，有人称、数和时态的变化。‎ ‎       一般现在时被动语态为：am/is/are+过去分词 ‎       一般过去时被动语态为：was/were+ 过去分词 ‎       与情态动词连用的被动语态：情态动词+ be + 过去分词 ‎   (4). 被动语态中动作的发出者或执行者做介词by的宾语，放在句 末，by 表示“由，被”的意思 如何理解被动语态？‎ ‎ 为取胜更清晰、更深刻地理解被动语态的含义，可以将主动语态和被动语态的句子结构进行比较。‎ ‎ 主动语态： 主语+    谓语动词   +   宾语  + 其他成分 ‎ 被动语态： 主语+  be +过去分词 +  by +宾语   +其他成分 ‎ 如：      Many people  speak  English.‎ 被动语态 English      is spoken   by many people.‎ ‎2. 本单元要掌握的句型 见课本P69 中的Grammar Focus ‎ ‎3. invent v. 发明  inventor n. 发明家  invention n. 发明 可数名词 ‎4. be used for doing用来做…(是被动语态) 如：‎ ‎   Pens are used for writing. 笔是用来写的。 Pens aren’t used for eating. 笔不是用来吃的。‎ ‎5. 给某人某样东西 give sth. to sb.  如：I gave a pen to him. 我给他一支笔。‎ ‎   give sb. sth.        I gave him a pen. 我给他一支笔。‎ ‎6. all day 整天 ‎7. salty  adj. 咸的  salt  n. 盐 ‎8. by mistake 错误地 如：‎ ‎  I took the umbrella by mistake. 我不小心拿错了雨伞。‎ ‎9. make sb./sth. +形容词 使…怎么样  It made me happy. 它使我高兴 ‎  make sb./sth. +名词  让…做…     It made me laugh. 它让我发笑 ‎10. by accident 意外 偶然  I met her by accident at bus stop. ‎ 我在公共汽车站意外地见到了她。‎ ‎11. not…until… 直到…才做… 如：‎ I didn’t go to bed until I finished my work.     我直到完成我的工作才去睡觉。‎ ‎12. according to +名词  根据… 如：    according to an legend according to this article根据这篇文章      根据一个神话 ‎13. over an open fire 野饮 ‎ ‎14. leaf  n. 叶子  复数形式 leaves ‎15. nearby adj. 附近的  如： the nearby river ‎16. fall into 落入 掉进 如：The leaf fell into the river. 叶子落入了河里。fall down 摔倒  如：She fell down from her bike. ‎ 她从她自行车摔倒了。‎ ‎17. quite 非常 adv.  与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的后面 ‎ ‎             如：    quite a beautiful girl 一个漂亮的女孩 ‎   very 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的前面 ‎ ‎             如：    a very beautiful girl 一个漂亮女孩 ‎    注：当不与冠词a 连用时，两者可以互用 如：‎ ‎        I am very happy.=== I am quite happy. 我非常高兴。‎ ‎18. in the way 这样 ‎ ‎19. pleased adj. 表示外部因素引起人发自内心的欣慰和愉快 ‎   pleasant adj. 愉快 高兴 指天气、时间、旅行令人高兴愉快 ‎   please v. 使高兴 使同意 ‎20. battery—operated  adj. 电池控制的是名词+动词的运动分词构成的合成形容词 ‎21. in the sixth century 在第6世纪 ‎ ‎22. travel around 周游 ‎23. more than === over 超过 如：    more than 300 == over 300 超过300‎ ‎24. including  prep. 介词  包括  可以与名词和动名词连用 ‎   如: Six people, including a baby, were hurt.       6个人包括一个小孩受伤了。‎ ‎25. have been played 被上演   是现在完成时的被动语态 ‎   现在完成时的被动语态的结构：have /has been +过去分词 ‎26. be born 出生  He was born in Canada. 他在加拿大出生 ‎27. safety n. 安全 safe adj. 安全的 ‎28. knock into 撞上(某人)‎ ‎29. divide sth. into … 将…划分成..‎ 通常指将一个整体分成几个对应相对的部分 如：‎ Let’s divide ourselves into 4groups. 让我们把我们自己划成4组。‎ ‎30. since then 自从那以后  常与完成时 态连用 如：‎ ‎    Since then, I have left ‎Beijing ‎. 自从那以后，我已经离开了北京。‎ 九年级英语 Unit10‎ ‎1. 过去完成时 ‎(1) 构成：由助动词had + 过去分词 构成 ‎           否定式：had not + 过去分词   缩写形式：hadn’t ‎ ‎  (2) 用法  过去完成时表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作。‎ ‎  (3) 它所表示的时间是“过去的过去”。‎ ‎①表示过去某一时间可用by, before 等构成的短语来表示 ‎②也可以用when, before, after 等引导的时间状语从句来表示 ‎ ‎    ③还可以通过宾语从句或通过上下文暗示。‎ When I got there, you had already eaten you meal. 当我到达那里时，你已经开始吃了。‎ By the time he got here, the bus had left. 到他到达这里时，汽车已经离开了 ‎2. by the time 直到…时候  ‎ 指从过去某一点到从句所示的时间为止的一段时间  如：‎ By the time we got to his house, he had finished supper. ‎ 在我们到达他就已经吃完了晚饭。‎ ‎3. 英语中表示“把某物遗忘在某处”常用 leave + 地点 ‎ 而不是forget+地点 如：Unluckily, I left my book at home ‎.                     不幸的是，我把书忘在家里了。‎ ‎4. close  v. 关   adv. 接近地 靠近地    closed  adj. 关的 ‎5. come out 出来 ‎ ‎6. on time 按时 准时 既不早也不迟  in time 及时 指在时限到来之前 ‎7. luckily adv. 幸运地  lucky adj. 幸运的 luck n. 好运 ‎8. give sb. a ride 让某搭便车  如：‎ ‎   He often gives me a ride to school. 他经常让我搭便车去学校。‎ ‎9.only just 刚刚好、恰好 ‎ ‎10. go off  (闹钟)闹响  The alarm went off just now. 刚才警钟响了。‎ ‎11. break down 坏掉 ‎ ‎12. fool  n. 傻子 呆子  v. 愚弄 欺骗 如：   He is a fool. 他是一个呆子。 ‎ ‎   We can’t fool our teach. 我们不能欺骗我们的教师。(动词)‎ ‎13. show up 出现 出席 She didn’t show up last night. 昨晚她没有出现 ‎14. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某做事 如：‎ ‎   My friend invited me to watch TV. 我的朋友邀请我看电视。‎ ‎15. set off 激起 出发 set up 建立 ‎16. ①so … that 如此…以致于 引导结果状语从句，so后面接形容词、副词.‎ ‎②so that作“为了”时，引导目的状语从句，从句常出现情态动词，‎ ‎            作结果状语从句时，从句中一般不用情态动词 。‎ 如：She got up early so that she could catch the bus. ‎ 为了能赶上车，她起得很早。(目的状语从句)‎ ‎ She was so sad that she couldn’t say a word. 她悲伤得一句话也说不出来。(结果状语从句)‎ ‎17. flee from 从…逃跑 避开如：They fled from their home. 他们从他们的家里逃了出来。‎ ‎18. thrill v . 使人非常激动，使人非常紧张 ‎   thrilled  adj. 指某人感到激动或感到紧张 ‎   thrilling  adj. 指某事物使人心情激动 ‎19. get married 结婚 ‎20. convince v. 使信服  convincing adj. 令人信服的 ‎21. land v. 着落 ‎22. be late for 迟到 ‎23. a piece of 一片/块/张 如： a piece of paper/ bread ‎ ‎                            一张纸/ 一块面包 九年级英语Unit11‎ ‎1.宾语从句     宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语。‎ ‎  ①由连接词+ 主语+ 谓语　构成 ‎  　常由下面的一些连接词引导：‎ ‎  ②由that 引导  表示陈述意义 that 可省略 ‎     He says (that) he is at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎  ③由if , whether 引导  表示一般疑问意义(带有是否、已否、对否等)‎ ‎      I don’t know if / whether Wei Hua likes fish. ‎ 我不知道韦华是否喜欢鱼。‎ ‎  ④由连接代词、连接副词(疑问词) 引导  表示特殊疑问意义 ‎      Do you know what he wants to buy?  你知道他想要买什么吗？‎ ‎  ⑤从句时态要与主句一致 ‎    当主句是一般现在时，从句根据情况使用任何时态 ‎    He says (that ) he is at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎    I don’t know (that) she is singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。‎ ‎    She wants to know if I have finished my homework. ‎ 她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。‎ ‎    Do you know when he will be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？‎ ‎    当主句是一般过去时，从句应使用过去某时态(一般过 去时,过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时)‎ ‎    He said (that) he was at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎    I didn’t know that she was singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。‎ She wanted to know if I had finished m homework. ‎ 她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。‎ Did you know when he would be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？‎ ‎2. get  v.  得到、买、到达 ‎3. make a telephone call 打电话 ‎ ‎4. save money 省钱、存钱 ‎ ‎5. ①问路常用的句子：‎ ‎     Do you know where …is ?‎ ‎     Can you tell me how can I get to …?‎ Could you tell me how to get to …？‎ ‎②Can/Could/Will/Would you please tell me sth. 表示十分客气地询问事情 ‎　③Could you tell me how to get to the park?‎ 请你告诉我怎么才能去邮局好吗？中的how to get to the park ‎ 是疑问词与动词不定式连用，用作宾语，但不是宾语从句，可是 相当于how I can get to the park（宾语从句）如：‎ I don’t know how to solve the problem.  ==‎ ‎ I don’t know how I can solve the problem.我不知道如何解决这个问题 ‎ Can you tell me when to leave?  ==‎ ‎ Can you tell me when I ill leave? 你能告诉我什么时候离开？‎ ‎6. 日常交际用语：‎ ‎  take the elevator / escalator to the … floor.乘电梯/自动扶梯到…楼 ‎  turn left / right === take a left / right  向左/ 右转 ‎  go past 经过    go straight 向前直走 ‎7. next to 旁边、紧接着  如：Lily is next to Ann.  莉莉就在安的旁边。‎ ‎8. between … and… 在…和…之间 ‎ 如: Lily is between Ann and Tom. 莉莉就在安和汤姆的之间。‎ ‎9. decide to do 决定做… She decided to go to have lunch. 她决定去吃午餐。‎ ‎   decide  v.    decision  n.   make a decision  做个决定 ‎10. Is that a good place to hang out? 那是不是一个闲荡的好地方？‎ ‎   中的to hang out修饰前面名词place，不定式作定语. ‎ 如：There are something to eat. 这有吃的东西。中的to eat修饰代词something，作定语.‎ ‎11. kind of +adj./ adv. 译为“有点、一点”‎ 如：   She is kind of shy. 她有点害羞。‎ ‎12. expensive 贵的 反义词 inexpensive 不贵的 ‎13. crowded 拥挤的 反义词 uncrowded 不拥挤的 ‎14. take a vacation == go on a vacation 去度假 ‎15.  dress up 打扮     dress up as 打扮成..‎ ‎    如：He wanted to dress up as Father Christmas.       他想要打扮成圣诞老人。‎ ‎16. on the beach  在海滩上 的介词用 on ‎17. politely  adv. 有礼貌地   polite  adj. 有礼貌的 ‎18. depend on sth / doing / 从句   根据、依靠、依赖、决定于 ‎   Living things depend on the sunlight.生物对阳光有依赖性。‎ ‎   We can’t depend on his answer. 我们不能根据他的回答。‎ ‎   That depends on how you did it. 那决定于你怎样做这件事。‎ ‎19. prefer动词  更喜欢 宁愿  常用的结构有：‎ ‎   prefer sth. 更喜欢某事 I prefer English. 我更喜欢英语。‎ ‎   prefer doing/ to do 宁愿做某事 I prefer sitting/ to sit.我宁愿坐着。‎ ‎   prefer sth to sth. 同…相比更喜欢… I prefer dogs to cats. ‎ 与猫相比我更喜欢狗。‎ ‎   prefer doing to doing 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事 I prefer walking to sitting. 我宁愿走路也不愿坐着 ‎   prefer to do rather than do 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事 ‎ ‎     I prefer to work rather than be free. 我宁愿工作而不愿闲着。‎ ‎20. on the other hand  另一方面 ‎21. 把…借给某人lend sb. sth. ＝  lend sth.to sb. 如：‎ ‎ Lily lent me her book. == Lily lent her book to me .莉莉把她的书借给了我。‎ ‎22. such as ‎23. I’m sorry to do sth. 对做某事我觉得很抱歉、伤心。‎ ‎24. in a way 在某种程度说 ‎25. in order to do  为了做…  表目的如：‎ ‎ He got up early in order to catch the first bus.‎ ‎  他起早床，是为了赶上头班公共汽车。‎ ‎26. 等级/同级比较：as…as ， not as/so…as ‎①as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as  ‎ 表示“和…一样的…”“…和…一样的…” ‎ ‎   　如：　He works as hard as we. 他工作和我们同样努力。‎ ‎   ②否定式：not as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as ‎ ‎== not so + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as ‎      He doesn’t work as / so hard as we. 他工作没有我们那样努力。‎ ‎27. hand in 上交 九年级英语Unit12‎ ‎1. be supposed to do .　应该　如：  We are supposed to stop smoking. 我们应该停止吸烟。‎ ‎　知识拓展　表示应该的词有：should, ought to ,be supposed to ‎ ‎2. shake hands　握手　　shake 本意是“摇动、震动”‎ ‎3. You should have asked what you were supposed to wear.‎ 你本应该问清楚怎么样穿才得体。中的“should have asked”是 ‎“情态动词＋现在完成时”表示过去本应该做某事，事实上没有做 如：She should have gone to Beijing. 她本应该去了北京。（没有去）‎ ‎4. be relaxed about sth.　对某事随意、不严格　如：‎ ‎　　They are relaxed about the time. 他们对时间很随意。‎ ‎5. pretty 　adv. 相当,很＝very　She is pretty friendly. 她相当友好。‎ ‎          adj. 美丽的     She is a pretty girl.她是一个美丽的女孩。‎ ‎6. make plans to do == plan to do. 打算做某事　如：‎ ‎　She has made plans to go to Beijing.==She has planed to go to Beijing.‎ ‎7. drop by 访问　看望　拜访　串门 ‎　　We just dropped by our friends’ homes.我们刚刚去朋友家串门。‎ ‎8. on time 按时 ‎9.　after all 毕竟　终究　如：　　　You see I was right after ‎ all.你看，毕竟还是我对了。‎ ‎10. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某事　如：‎ ‎　　　Lily invited me to have dinner.莉莉请我吃晚饭。‎ ‎11. without 没有 ‎12. around the world == all over the world 全世界 ‎13. pick up 捡起　挑选　如：He picked up his hat. 他捡起他的帽子。‎ ‎14. start doing == start to do 开始做某事　如 ‎　　He started reading.== He started to read. 他开始读。‎ ‎15. point at 指向　‎ ‎16. stick v. 剌　截　　n. 棒，棍　‎ ‎   chopstick 筷子　是由chop(砍)＋stick(棒)合成，通常用复数形式：chopsticks ‎17. go out of one’s way to do 特意，专门做某事　如：‎ ‎　　He went out of his way to make me happy. 他特意使我高兴。‎ ‎18. make mistakes 犯错误（复数）make a mistake 犯错误（一个）‎ ‎19. be different from 与…不同　　如：‎ ‎　　　Chinese food is different from theirs. 中国菜与他们的不同.‎ ‎20.  get/be used to sth. 习惯于…‎ get/be used to doing　习惯于…‎ ‎  　   be used to do 　　被用于做…‎ ‎        be used for doing　被用于做…‎ ‎           used to do 过去常常做…　如： ‎ I wash clothes everyday. But I’m used to it.‎ 我每天都洗衣服，但我习惯了 I am used to washing clothes. 我习惯于洗衣服了。‎ ‎     The knives are used to cut things. 小刀被用来切东西。‎ ‎     The knives are used for cutting things. 小刀被用来切东西。‎ ‎　   She used to watch TV after school. 她过去放学后常常看电视。‎ ‎21. 我发现要记住每一样事是困难的。‎ I find it difficult to remember everything. ‎ ‎ 形式宾语　　  真正宾语 常见的形式宾语有：　　find / think + it/them +形容词 to do sth. 如：‎ ‎　           I think it hard to study English.‎ ‎22. cut up 切开　切碎　如：Let’s cut up the water melon. 让我们切开这个西瓜吧。‎ ‎23. make a toast 敬酒 ‎24. crowd  v.挤满  其形容词和过去式及过去分词都是：crowded ‎25. set n. 一套　　v. 设置 ‎26. can’t stop doing 忍不住做某事　I can’t stop laughing. 我忍不住笑 ‎27. make faces　做鬼脸　　‎ ‎28.　face to face 面对面 ‎29. learn…by oneself 自学　如：　　　I learn English by my self. 我自学英语。‎ Unit 13 Rainy days make me sad.‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. I’d rather go to the Blue Lagoon Restaurant... (P102)我宁愿去Blue Lagoon餐厅，……‎ would rather意为“宁愿……”，表示句子主语的愿望、选择，后接省去to的不定式。‎ He’d rather join you in the English Group. 他宁愿加入到你的英语小组中来。‎ Which would you rather have, bread or rice? 面包和米饭，你更喜欢哪一个？‎ 如果表示“宁愿（可）……也不愿……”则用句型would rather...than...。在would rather和than后面所连接的两个对比部分一般要一致。‎ The brave soldier would rather die than give in.那个勇敢的士兵宁死不屈。‎ He’d rather work than play. 他宁愿工作也不愿玩。‎ They preferred to die of hunger rather than take his bread.‎ 他们宁愿饿死也不愿接受他的面包。 ‎ ‎2. Loud music makes me happy. (P103)嘈杂的音乐使我很开心。‎ Loud music always makes me want to dance. (P103)嘈杂的音乐总是使我想去跳舞。‎ 这两句是动词make的使役用法，make me后分别接了形容词和不定式短语。make的这种用法常见于以下结构：‎ ‎◎ make+名词（代词）+省略to的动词不定式 My parents often make me do some other homework. 我父母常让我做些其他的作业。‎ 特别提示 这一结构中的不定式短语在主动结构中是宾语补足语，必须省去to，变为被动结构时，不定式短语作主语补足语，这时必须带to。‎ She was made to work for the night shift. 她不得不上夜班。‎ ‎◎make+名词/代词+-ed分词短语 What made them so frightened?什么使他们这样害怕？‎ Can you make yourself understood in English?你能用英语把意思表达清楚吗？‎ ‎◎make+名词/代词+介词短语或名词短语 She made him her assistant. 她委派他做自己的助手。‎ Sit down and make yourselves at home, everyone.大家请坐，不要拘束。‎ ‎◎make+名词（代词）+形容词或形容词短语。‎ The good news made us happy. 这条好消息使我们很高兴。‎ ‎3. ... small restaurants can serve many people every day. (P104)……小饭店每天就可以多接待些顾客。‎ 句中的serve 有“服侍，侍候，招待”等意思，常用于以下结构中：‎ ‎◎ serve+宾语 They were busy serving the day’s last buyers.他们正忙着接待这天的最后一批顾客。‎ Nobody can serve two masters. 一人不能侍奉二主。‎ ‎◎ serve sb sth, 或serve sth to sb Mrs Turner served us a very good dinner.‎ ‎=Mrs Turner served a very good dinner to us.‎ 特纳太太招待我们吃了一顿丰盛的晚餐。‎ ‎ ◎ serve sb with sth We served them with beer and wine. 我们用啤酒和红酒招待他们。‎ ‎4. However, some advertising can be confusing or misleading. (P106)可是，一些广告可能会混淆黑白或误导消费。‎ confusing与misleading是两个现在分词，相当于形容词，意思分别是“感到混消的”和“误导的”，在句中作表语，主语通常是表示物的名词或代词，如本句中的用法；也可以用作定语，既可修饰表示人的名词或代词，也可以修饰表示物的名词或代词。‎ They can be some confusing or misleading advertisements.‎ 它们可能是一些混淆黑白或误导消费的广告。‎ What he said made us confusing.他说的话令我们感到困惑。‎ ‎5. At times an ad can lead you to buy something you don’t need at all.(P106) 有时，一则广告会诱导你去买你根本就不需要的东西。‎ at times意为“有时，不时”，与sometimes同义。两者在句中的位置较灵活，可位于句首，句中或句末。‎ At times I make mistakes when I speak English. 我说英语时有时会出错。‎ They went to town at times during the cold winter.在寒冷的冬天，他们有时候进城去。‎ Sometimes they walk to school. 有时候，他们步行上学。‎ He sometimes plays football with his friends. 他有时和朋友一起踢足球。‎ ‎6. To start with, it was raining, and rainy days make me sad. (P107)起初，天在下雨，雨天使我心情很不好。‎ ‎◎ start with作“首先”解时，只用于动词不定式，在句中常常以插入语的形式出现。‎ To start with, the computer room must be kept very clean.‎ 首先，计算机工作室必须保持清洁。‎ Our group had five members, to start with.刚开始，我们小组只有五个人。‎ ‎◎ start with可表示“从……开始”；“先从某事做起”，与begin...with是同义词组。反义词组是end with“以……结束”。‎ He started/began with the aim of injuring others only to end up by ruining himself.他本想损害别人，结果只害了自己。‎ The meeting ended with a speech given by the chairman.会议以主席的讲话结束。‎ He wanted to start/begin with the smallest country and end with the largest one.‎ 他打算先去最小的国家，最后去最大的国家。‎ ‎◎ start单独使用时，意为“开始”，可用作及物动词或不及物动词。用作及物动词时，其后跟名词、代词，也可跟动词不定式或动名词形式。begin是start的同义词，两者在用法上没有很大差别，只是start侧重动作的突然开始。‎ As soon as we got there, it started raining.我们一到那儿就下雨了。‎ When did we start/begin this lesson?我们是什么时候开始讲这一课的？‎ ‎7. ...some people would rather just give money.(P108)……有些宁愿只给钱。‎ 句中的would rather是would rather...than...的省略形式，意为“宁愿……而不……”，表示主观愿望。使用这一结构，要注意两个比较的部分对等。‎ You would also rather stay at home and read a good book than go to a party.‎ 你宁愿待在家里看一本好书也不愿去参加舞会。‎ I would rather have the small one than the big one.我宁愿要小的，不要大的。‎ 特别提示 比较的部分如果是动词，than后应是动词原形。‎ ‎8. I prefer to receive a gift... (P108)我宁愿接受一件……礼物。‎ prefer表示选择时，可用两种句型。‎ ‎（1）prefer+名词或动名词+to+名词或动名词。‎ They prefer red to blue.与蓝色相比，他们更喜欢红色。‎ I preferred doing something to doing nothing.我喜欢做点什么，而不喜欢闲着。‎ ‎（2）prefer+不定式或名词+rather than+不带to的动词不定式。‎ He preferred to walk there rather than go by bus.‎ 他喜欢走着去那儿，不喜欢乘公共汽车。‎ She prefers to read rather than sit idle.她喜欢读书而不愿闲坐着。‎ Unit 14 Have you packed yet?‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. Sorry I couldn’t get back to you sooner. (P112)很抱歉我没能尽快给你回复。‎ 这是在E-mail message回复中的常用语,句中“get back to sb”‎ 的意思是“以后再答复”。‎ I can’t give you a definite answer now but I’ll get back to you about it soon.‎ 我现在不能给你一个明确的回答，但我很快会给你答复的。‎ ‎2. In the past twelve months, they’ve had three major concerts and made a hit CD. (P114)在过去的十二个月里，他们举办了三场较大的音乐会，出版了一张很受欢迎的CD唱片。‎ ‎（1）“in the past+时间段”常用于完成时的句子中，表示“在过去的……时间里”，past是形容词，可以用last来替换，而past/last的后面通常要使用“数字+名词”的结构。‎ In the past/last two years, she has studied English very hard.‎ 在过去的两年里，她一直在努力地学英语。‎ ‎（2）短语make a hit表示“大获成功”、“（演出等）大受欢迎；受到赞扬”等，hit是名词，表示成功而风行一时的事物，如电影，歌曲，演出等。‎ Zhou Jielun has just made a hit CD. 周杰伦刚出版了一盘轰动一时的CD。‎ His song was a great hit. 他的歌曲轰动一时。‎ He made a great hit in teaching. 他曾在教学上获得了巨大的成功。‎ ‎3. And then they’re going to go on a world tour in which they will perform in ten different cities. (P114)然后，他们将去世界各地旅行并在十个城市巡回演出。‎ ‎...in which they will perform in ten different cities是定语从句，先行词是tour,在关系代词which前介词in通常的位置是在动词perform的后面。本句为了避免与in two different cities短语中的in重复，将perform后的第一个in前置。句中perform主要指扮演角色，演奏某种乐器，演出某一节目，侧重能力，技巧，效果，可用作及物动词和不及物动词。‎ The magician performed wonderful tricks. 魔术师表演了精彩的魔术。‎ He performs perfectly on the piano. 他的钢琴演奏太棒了。‎ ‎4. Be sure not to miss them if they come to a city near you — if you can get tickets, that is. (P114)如果他们来到你附近的城市，千万不要错过——当然，如果你能弄到票的话。‎ ‎（1）句中的that is表示“确切地；换句话说；也就是”，用来表达一个准确的说法，即对前面的内容加以准确地说明。‎ She’s a housewife — when she’s not teaching English, that is.‎ 她是个家庭主妇——是指她不教英语的时候。‎ ‎（2）句中miss是“错过”，后接名词、代词或v-ing形式，不可接不定式。‎ They missed the train by two minutes.他们差两分钟没赶上火车。‎ I came late and missed seeing the beginning of the movie.‎ 我来晚了，没有看见电影的开始部分。‎ miss还可表示“丢失”、“失去”，与lose同义。‎ ‎5. ...but we really hope to have a number one hit some day. (P114)……但是我们真的希望有朝一日我们制作出能卖得最好的一首歌。‎ some day意为“将来某一日”，等于someday,与one day是近义词。some day/someday只表示将来，不表示过去。而one day用在过去时的句子里是“有一天”的意思，用在将来时的句子里是“将有一天”，与some day/someday可互换。‎ He will be a scientist some day.总有一天他会成为科学家。‎ I hope to see you one day/someday.我希望有一天会看到你。‎ One day last summer they made a trip to the country.‎ 去年夏天某日他们到乡间旅行。‎ 试译：你一定要有一天来看我。‎ You must come one day to see me.‎ You must come some day to see me.‎ You must come to see me someday.‎ 魔力纠错 他有一天来看了我。‎ 误：He came some day to see me.‎ 正：He came one day to see me.‎ ‎6. ...as a part of the “In Search of Roots” summer camp program. (P116)……作为“寻根”夏令营活动的一部分。‎ in search for是固定短语,for 后面的名词同样必须是“寻找的目标”，不是“搜寻的对象”。search前常出现a 或one’s等词对search加以限定或修饰，这个短语也常作目的状语。‎ The soldiers were sent in a search for the missing aircraft. ‎ 士兵们被派去搜寻失踪的飞机。‎ So far, they have been unlucky in their search for gold and have no money at all.‎ 到现在为止，他们寻找金子的运气一直不好，而且他们身上也没钱了。‎ 知识拓展 search的基本用法 ‎（1）search的动词用法。‎ ‎◎ search不与介词或副词搭配时是及物动词，表示“搜查”的意思，其后通常接处所或人物名词，表示搜查的对象。‎ He even searched my home without any reason.‎ 他甚至毫无理由地搜查了我的家。‎ I’ve searched my memory, but can’t remember that man’s name.‎ 我苦思良久，仍然记不起那人的名字。‎ They searched every part of the building. 他们对全楼进行了搜查。‎ ‎◎ search用不及物动词，后面接介词for 和after，构成及物性动词短语，两者是“搜寻，寻找”‎ 的意思，表示花费极大的气力去搜寻某个特定的目标，常含有对立或不对立的意味，两者可以通用，只不过search for 更常见些。‎ For a whole day they searched for/after the lost child.‎ 他们找了一天这个丢失的孩子。‎ ‎7. ...and so far has brought thousands of overseas Chinese students... (P116) ……到目前为止，它带来了成千上万的海外华裔学生……‎ so far 意思是“到目前为止”，常用于完成时，表示动作从过去开始一直延续到现在，强调到目前为止的情况,可位于句首，也可位于句末。‎ So far, no man has traveled farther than the moon.‎ 到现在为止，还没有人到过比月球更远的地方。‎ How many travelers have been to Disneyland so far?‎ 到现在为止有多少旅客到过迪斯尼乐园？‎ So far we haven’t got any news from them.‎ 到目前为止，我们还没有得到他们的任何消息。‎ ‎8. Most, like Robert, can hardly speak any Chinese, and have never been to China before. (P116) 像罗伯特一样，大多数人几乎都不会说中文，而且以前从来没有到过中国。‎ ‎（1）hardly是一个否定副词，表示“几乎不，简直不”，相当于almost not，含有否定的意义，故在句中不能另加否定词。切莫将hardly误认为是由hard+ly构成的副词。此外，hardly 位于句首时，要用倒装语序。‎ I hardly know what to say. 我简直不知道说什么好。‎ Hardly can I move this heavy desk. 我简直移不动这张重桌子。‎ ‎— Can you catch what I said?你能听懂我说的话吗？‎ ‎— Sorry, I can hardly understand it.对不起，我几乎听不懂。‎ ‎（2）have been后面接to表示某人“去过某地，现在已经回来了”，可用于各种人称。‎ Have you ever been to Shanghai? 你曾经去过上海吗？‎ He has been to America twice. 他到美国去过两次。‎ ‎【友情链接】have gone to与have been in的用法 have gone 表示某人“去某地了”，不论是在途中还是到了目的地，重点是强调这个人已经不在说话人所在的地方了，常用于第三人称；have been in，则表示一直“呆在某个地方”，常与表示一段时间状语连用。‎ Henry has gone to London. 亨利到伦敦去了。‎ They have been in Beijing for two weeks. ‎ 他们在北京已经有两个星期了。‎ ‎10. Thanks to In Search of Roots... (P116)多亏“寻根”……‎ ‎【知识归纳】thanks, thanks to与thanks for的用法 ‎◎ thanks是名词thank的复数形式，意为“感谢”。表示“感谢”之意，可以说：‎ Thanks a lot.‎ Many thanks.‎ A thousand thanks.‎ ‎◎ thanks to是介词词组，后面可以接名词或代词，意为“多亏”；“由于”，在句中作原因状语。‎ Thanks to the old man, we found the lost child at last.‎ 多亏那个老人，我们最后找到了失踪的孩子。‎ ‎◎ thanks for用于对别人已做的事表示感谢，后接名词，代词，或v-ing形式。‎ Thanks for sending me such a nice present.谢谢你寄来这么好的礼品。‎ A thousand thanks for your help.非常感谢你的帮助。‎ Unit 15 We’re trying to save the manatees!‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. In 1972, it was discovered that they are endangered.(P119) 1972年，人们发现它们已经濒于灭绝。‎ was discovered是一般过去时的被动语态，discover“发现”，近义词为find和invent。‎ ‎【友情链接】discover, invent与find ‎◎discover指发现过去所不知道的东西，新奇或意外的东西。‎ Coal was first discovered and used in China.‎ 中国首先发现并使用了煤。‎ Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October, 1492.‎ ‎1492年10月12日，哥伦布发现了美洲。‎ ‎◎invent意为“发明”，即创造出以前从未存在过的东西。‎ Edison invented the electric lamp.爱迪生发明了电灯。‎ Radio had just been invented then.那时无线电刚刚发明出来。‎ ‎◎find意为“找到”，侧重于找到过去丢失的人或物，但有时也表示凭经验或偶然发现了一种东西。‎ Today, corn is found all over the world.今天，全世界都有了玉米。‎ She found him a very good pupil.她发现他是个非常好的学生。‎ ‎◎有时find和discover可以互相替代，意思相同。‎ His notebook was found/discovered in the desk.‎ 他的笔记本是在课桌里找到的。‎ ‎2. Some of the swamps have become polluted. (P119)一些沼泽地受到了污染。‎ have become polluted 中的become是连系动词，polluted是过去分词。这种“系动词+过去分词”结构，意思上也接近被动语态。‎ The slodier got wounded(接近were wounded)in the battle.‎ 这几名战士在这场战斗中受了伤。‎ A few minutes later, the ground became/was covered with snow.‎ 几分钟后地上尽是雪。‎ ‎3. They provide homes for many endangered animals... (P120)他们为许多濒临灭绝的动物提供家园……‎ provide是及物动词，意为“提供”，“供给”。表示“提供……人……‎ 物件”是provide...with...；“提供……给……人”是provide...for...。‎ The school provides us with all the materials we need.‎ 学校提供我们所需要的一切资料。‎ We are provided with everything we need for work.‎ 我们被提供了工作所需要的一切。‎ The school provides all the books we need for us.‎ 学校为我们提供我们需要的书籍。‎ ‎【友情提示】‎ ‎◎ provide for是“供养”的意思。‎ He has a large family to provide for. 他要养活一个大家庭。‎ ‎4. ...and help to educate the public about caring for them. (P120)……并且帮助教育公众关爱它们。‎ care for表示“喜欢”，“关心”之意，后接名词或v-ing形式作宾语，take care of也有这个意思。‎ He cared nothing for skating. 他对滑冰没有兴趣。‎ In our class, we care for each other. 在我们班上，我们相互关心。‎ Maria takes good care of everybody. 玛丽亚很关心大家。‎ ‎【友情链接】care for还可以表示“照顾”，“照料”，相当于take care of或look after。‎ At night he fed and cared for the cattle.‎ ‎ 夜里他照料牲口，给牲口喂食。‎ You must care for yourselves.‎ ‎=You must look after yourselves.‎ 你们要照顾好自己。‎ The children are well cared for in the nurseries.‎ ‎=The children are taken good care of in the nurseries.‎ 孩子们在托儿所受到很好的照顾。‎ ‎5. turn off the shower while you are washing your hair. (P121)洗头的时候关掉淋浴。‎ ‎（1）turn off表示“关掉”，用在关掉收音机，煤气，自来水等场合。与其相关的几个短语是turn on“打开”，turn down“关小”，turn up“开大”。‎ ‎（2）句中while与when是同义词，都可以用从属连词，引导状语从句表示时间，意思都是“当（在）……的时候”，但二者之间是有区别的。‎ ‎【友情链接】while与when的用法 ‎◎ when的含义是at or during the time that,既可用于指一点时间（从句的谓语动词需用终止性动词），也可用于指一段时间（从句的谓语动词用延续性动词），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动作或状态能同时发生，或一先一后发生。‎ He wants to help people when they are ill.‎ 他想在人们生病的时候帮助他们。‎ When he got to Shanghai, the ship had already set off.‎ 他到达上海时，轮船已经开走了。‎ ‎◎ while的含义是during the time that,只能用于指一段时间（从句的谓语动词必须是延续性的），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动作只能同时发生，不能一先一后发生。‎ While I was reading, my mother was washing clothes.‎ 我读书时，妈妈在洗衣服。‎ ‎◎这两个词还可以用作并列连词。when表示“在那时”或“这时突然”，相当于and just at that time的意思，用来连接两个并列分句，有时when分句之前有逗号把前后两个分句分开。‎ I stayed till sunset, when it began to rain.‎ 我一直呆到太阳下山，这时天开始下雨了。‎ ‎◎ while意为“而”，“却”，表示对照关系。‎ Some like collecting stamps, while others like planting flowers.‎ 有些人喜欢集邮，而有些人却喜欢种花。‎ ‎6. You have probably never heard of Amy Winterbourne. (P122) 你可能从来没有听说过Amy Winterbourne。‎ ‎【知识归纳】hear, hear from, hear of与hear that clause的用法：‎ ‎（1）hear单独使用表示“听见”，“听到”，常用的结构有：‎ ‎◎ hear sb/sth“听到某人或某物的声音”。‎ I can’t hear you at all. 我根本就听不到你的声音。‎ Haven’t you heard anything? 难道你没有听到什么声音？‎ ‎◎ hear sb do sth“听到某人做某事”。‎ I often hear Li Ping read English in the morning.‎ 我经常在早晨听到李平读英语。‎ ‎◎ hear sb doing sth“听到某人正在做某事”。‎ I heard him singing in the next room.我听见他正在隔壁房间里唱歌。‎ 特别提示 hear sb do sth指听到整个行动或整个事件；而hear sb doing sth是指听到了行动的一部分，有正在发生的意思。试比较：‎ I heard the boy go down the stairs.我听到这个男孩走下楼去。‎ I heard the boy going down the stairs我听到这个男孩下楼的声音。‎ ‎（2）hear from意为“收到……的信”；“得到……消息”。‎ How often do you hear from your father? 你每隔多久收到你父亲的信？‎ Have you still not heard from him? 你还没有收到他的信吗？‎ I haven’t heard from him since he telephoned.‎ 自从他打电话以来，我一直没有他的消息。‎ 特别提示 hear from的宾语是表示人的名词或代词，而不是表示信件的名词。‎ 魔力纠错 我们好几个星期未收到他的信了。‎ 误：We haven’t heard from his letter for weeks.‎ 正：We haven’t heard from him for weeks.‎ 正：We haven’t got a letter from him for weeks.‎ ‎（3）hear of意为“听说”，后面接名词，代词或动名词。‎ I’ve never heard of that before.我以前从未听说过那件事。‎ She disappeared and was never heard of again. ‎ 她不知去向了，再未听到她的消息。‎ ‎（4）hear接从句，是“听说”的意思。‎ One day, the Smiths heard that there was a good doctor in a town not far away.‎ 一天，史密斯一家听说不远的镇里有一位好医生。‎ I hear that one of the pandas has a baby.‎ 我听说其中一只熊猫生了个熊猫宝宝。‎ ‎7. She is a most unusual woman. (P122)她是一个十分不寻常的女性。‎ ‎【知识归纳】a most, the most与most的用法 ‎（1）a most的用法。在“a most+形容词+名词”结构中，most是副词，意为“很，非常”，相当于very,用来修饰它后面的形容词，本句就是这一用法。‎ Guilin is a most beautiful city.桂林是座非常美丽的城市。‎ This is a most interesting story.这是一个非常有趣的故事。‎ ‎（2）the most 的用法 ‎◎在“the most+形容词+名词”结构中,most 是副词，表示程度，意为“最”，与其后的形容词一起构成形容词的最高级。‎ He is one of the most famous writers in China. 他是中国最著名的作家之一。‎ This is the most difficult (one) of the three. 这是这三者中最难的。‎ ‎◎在“动词+the most”结构中，most 也是副词，其作用和意思是“最”其位置通常在动词后。‎ They like English the most. 他们最喜欢英语。‎ ‎（3）most 通常有三种用法 ‎◎在“most+副词或形容词”结构中，most 是副词，意为“很，非常，十分”。‎ I shall most certainly go there. 我十分肯定会到那里去。‎ ‎◎在“most+名词”结构中，most 是形容词，意为“大部分的，大多数”或“最多的”。‎ Most students like English. 大多数学生喜欢英语。‎ Who has (the) most books among you?你们中谁的书最多？‎ ‎8. The walls are made from old glass bottles that are glued together. (P122) 墙是由旧玻璃瓶粘在一起建成的。‎ be made from/of意为“由……（原料）制成”‎ ‎，后面一般接物质名词。接from则表示某物品制成后，已看不出原材料是什么，原材料在制作过程中已起了化学变化；接of表示某物品制成后，仍可看得出原材料，其原料在制作过程中仅起了物理变化。‎ Nylon is made from air, coal and water.尼龙是由空气，煤和水加工制成的。‎ Wine is made from grapes. 葡萄酒是由葡萄制成的。‎ The desk is made of wood. 这桌子是由木头做的。‎ The shoes are made of cloth.这鞋子是用布做的。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎ be made up of表示某物或某组织由一种种成分或一个个成员组成。‎ The world is made up of matter.世界是由物质构成的。‎ A TV set is made up of hundreds of different parts.‎ 电视机是由数百个不同的零件组装成的。‎ ‎◎ be made into意为“把……做成……”，主语在意义上为原材料，介词宾语在意义上为制成品。‎ Bamboo is also made into paper.竹子也可以用来造纸。‎ ‎◎be made in意思是“在……（地点）制造”，介词in后接产地。‎ This kind of computer is made in the USA．这种电脑是美国制造的。‎ This printing machine was made in Beijing.这台印刷机是北京生产的。‎ ‎◎be made by意思是“由……制造”，介词by后跟动作的执行者。‎ This model ship is made by Uncle Wang. 这个轮船模型是由王叔叔制作的。‎ ‎9. Amy recently won an award from the Help Save Our Planet Society. (P122)艾米最近获得了“救助地球”协会的奖励。‎ ‎（1）recently 表示“最近”，既可以用于表示一段时间，也可以表示一点时间，多用于完成时态。‎ Have you hear from Michael recently?你最近接到迈克尔的来信吗？‎ Recently he has made quite a few mistakes. 最近他出了不少错。‎ ‎（2）won a award中award是 “奖”的意思，相关词语有prize，reward和scholarship，这几个词都与“奖”有关。‎ ‎（3）句中的win表示“赢”奖的意思。‎ At the national amateur song-writing contest, he won a first-class award.‎ 在全国业余作曲比赛中，他获得了一等奖。‎ win可表示“赢得比赛，战斗”等，宾语一般是比赛，竞赛，战争等名词，与beat近义。‎ 知识拓展 win与beat的用法 两者在表示“赢”，“胜”的意思时，后面所接的宾语有所不同。“赢比赛或一场战斗”用win；“赢某人”是beat。‎ ‎ We won the match months ago. 几个月前，我们赢得那场比赛。‎ Which side won the battle? 这一战谁打胜了？‎ But still we weren’t sure we could beat them.‎ 但是我们还不能肯定我们能打赢他们。‎ Dick beat John and won the game. 狄克打败了约翰，赢得了比赛。人教版新目标英语9年级unit10-12‎ Unit 10 By the time I got outside,the bus had already left.‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. When I got to school, I realized I had left my backpack at home. (P76)我到学校时才发现把书包落在家了。‎ ‎(1)had left my backpack at home 这是一个过去完成时的句子，表示在过去某一时间或某一动作之前完成的动作或存在的状态。‎ By three o’clock yesterday afternoon we had finished the work.‎ 到昨天下午三点，我们已经完成了工作。‎ She had learned a lot of English before she went to school. ‎ 在上学之前，她已经学会了很多英语。‎ ‎(2)left是leave的过去式，在此处意为“遗忘”，“忘记”，后面常有地点状语。‎ Li Min left his dictionary in the reading-room yesterday. ‎ 昨天李民把词典忘在阅览室里了。‎ 特别提示 forget作“遗忘”解时，后面没有“遗忘”的地点。‎ I have forgotten the book. 我忘记拿书了。‎ ‎2. My alarm clock didn’t go off, and by the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom and I had to wait for him to come out. (P78)我的闹钟坏了，因此等我醒来的时候，我父亲已经进去洗澡了，我只好等他出来。‎ ‎(1)go off 是“（闹钟）闹响”的意思，即“发出声音”。‎ The thieves ran away when the burglar alarm went off. ‎ 防盗警报器一响，窃贼立刻逃走了。‎ ‎(2)by the time I woke up 中的by the time意为“到……的时候”。‎ By the time he was ten, Tom built a chemistry lab himself. ‎ 等到了十岁的时候，汤姆自己建了一个化学实验室。‎ ‎3. I started walking, but I knew I couldn’t get to school on time. (P78)我开始步行，但我知道我已经不能按时到达学校了。‎ ‎(1)start to do sth和start doing sth都表示“开始做某事”，常可相互替换。‎ At the age of 12, he started writing his own newspaper.‎ ‎= At the age of 12, he started to write his own newspaper.‎ 他十二岁时，开始编写自己的报纸。‎ ‎(2)on time在本句中意为“准时，按规定的时间不早也不迟”。‎ Li Ming’s father seldom goes work on time. 李明的父亲很少准时上班。‎ The party began on time that evening. 晚会在那天下午准时举行。‎ 知识拓展 time表示“……次/倍”时，是可数名词，其复数形式为times。‎ How many times did you see the movie? 那部电影你看了几遍？‎ I have four times as many books as you.我的书是你的4倍。‎ 特别提示 in time意为“及时”。‎ I will try my best to finish it in time. 我会尽力及时完成。‎ Will you be home in time to see the children before they go to bed? ‎ 你来得及在孩子们上床睡觉之前赶回家看看他们吗？‎ 短语链语 all the time始终、总是, at any time在任何时候, at the same time同时, by the time在……时候以前, from time to time偶尔, have a good/bad time过得快乐/不快乐, in no time立刻, in time及时, many a time屡次, at times有时, take one’s time慢慢来\别着急, The Times《泰晤士报》（英国一大报）, two times three 2乘以3‎ ‎4. Luckily, my friend Tony and his dad came by in his dad’s car and they gave me a ride. (P78)幸运的是，我的朋友托尼和他的爸爸乘他爸爸的小车过来了，带了我一程。‎ ‎(1)luckily是个副词，意为“幸运地，有运气地”，在句中常用作状语。‎ Luckily, he didn’t hurt himself when he fell.‎ ‎ 算他运气好，跌倒了没有受伤。‎ Luckily, she was in when I called. 真走运，我打电话时她正好在。‎ ‎(2)give sb a ride意为“让人搭便车”，其中ride是名词。‎ Please give me a ride to my school, I’m going to be late.‎ 请把我带到学校去，我要迟到了。‎ If you go to station, I can give you a ride. 如果你去车站，我可以带你一程。‎ ‎5. When I got to school, the final bell was ringing. I only just made it to my class. (P78)我到学校的时候，上课铃正在响。我刚好正点赶到教室上课。‎ ‎(1) final bell在此处作“上课铃”解，有时也写为second bell，而“预备铃”则表示为first bell。‎ ‎(2) made it在这里表示“到达、赶上”的意思。‎ You can make it if you hurry. 如果你快一点的话，就会按时赶到的。‎ ‎6. Have you ever forgotten to bring your homework to school? (P78)你是否曾经忘记将作业带到学校了呢？‎ ‎(1)ever在这里是“曾经”的意思,常用于现在完成时里，询问对方是否有过某种经历。 ‎ Have you ever been to London? 你曾经去过伦敦吗？‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎‎ ever用于一般疑问句、否定句以及表示条件或比较的从句中，意为“在（以往）任何时候”，“从来”，“在某时”等。‎ Nowadays he hardly ever comes. 最近他几乎不来了。‎ None of us will ever forget that exciting scene. ‎ 我们大家永远都不会忘记那个令人激动的场面。‎ ‎◎ever用于特殊疑问句中，意为“究竟、到底”。‎ Which ever do you want? 你究竟要哪一个？‎ When ever did you lose it? 你究竟什么时候丢失这个东西的？‎ ‎◎ever用于含有最高级的从句中，可用来加强语气。‎ Li Siguang is the greatest scientist that ever lived.李四光是古今最伟大的科学家。‎ 短语链语 ‎◎ever after“从那以后”‎ They lived happily ever after. 从那以后他们幸福地生活着。‎ ‎◎ever since“从……以来”‎ I’ve known him ever since he was a boy. 我从小就认识他。‎ ‎◎ever so“非常”‎ Li Xiang is ever so strong. 李翔非常强壮。‎ ‎◎for ever“永远”‎ We love our motherland for ever. 我们永远爱我们的祖国。‎ ‎(2)forgotten to bring是“忘记带来”的意思，构成forget to do sth 句型，表示“忘记将要做某事”（事情还没有做）。‎ Don’t forget to turn off the lights when you leave the room.‎ 离开房间时不要忘记关灯。‎ 特别提示 forget doing sth 表示“忘记做过某事”（事情做过,但忘了）。‎ I forgot returning the book to the library.我忘记曾把这本书还给图书馆了。‎ ‎7. In 1938, a radio program by actor Orson Welles announced that aliens from Mars had landed on the earth. (P80)1938年，由Orson Welles主持的电台节目宣布来自火星的外星人在地球上登陆了。‎ ‎(1)announce 意思是“宣布”，常指首次公开或正式宣布人们关心的某件事情。‎ The new government announced its policy at once.新政府立即宣布了它的政策。‎ The headmaster announced the result of the exam. 校长宣布考试成绩。‎ 知识拓展 announcer，名词，“宣布者”，“播音员”；announcement名词，“宣告”，“通告”，“预告”。‎ ‎(2)aliens是“外侨”的意思，在这里指的是“来自另一世界的生物”，与from Mars搭配，表示“来自火星的外星人”。‎ ‎(3)on the earth意为“在地球上”，而in the earth却是“在地里”，“在地下”的意思。‎ We live on the earth. 我们生活在地球上。‎ In the winter some animals hide in the earth. 冬天有些动物藏在地下。‎ 特别提示 on earth表示“究竟”，“到底”，常用在who, what, where, when, why等特殊疑问词后，以加强疑问的语气;也可以用在否定词之后，以加强否定的语气。‎ How on earth did you know it? 你到底是怎么知道的？‎ Nothing on earth could make him change his mind.无论什么都不能使他改变注意。‎ ‎◎on earth还可意为“在世界上”，“世间”，有时用于最高级之后，以加强其含义。‎ You are the happiest man on earth. 你是世界上最幸福的人。‎ ‎8. Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story, and panic set off across the whole country. (P80)Welles的话是如此具有说服力，以至于成百上千人相信了他的话，全国处于一片恐慌之中。‎ ‎(1)so...that在这里引导结果状语从句，表示“如此……以至于……”，that后面接从句，常见的句型有：‎ ‎◎主语+系动词（be, become等）+so+形容词+that从句。‎ The computer is so useful that each of us wants to buy one.‎ 计算机太有用了，我们每个人都想买一台。‎ ‎◎主语+行为动词+so+副词+that从句。‎ He ran so fast that we couldn’t catch up with him. 他跑得太快，我们追不上他。‎ ‎◎so...that后面也可以跟so many/few加复数可数名词或so much/little加不可数名词。‎ He had so many falls that he could ride a bike at last. ‎ 他摔了很多跤，终于学会了骑车。‎ There’s so much noise in the meeting room that I can’t hear the speaker clearly.‎ 会议室里的噪音太大，我听不清演讲者的发言。‎ 知识拓展 so...that句型转换的四种方法 ‎◎当从句的主语与主句中的主语一致，且that从句是否定式时，常用too...to...转换。‎ The little girl was so tired that she couldn’t walk farther.‎ ‎=The little girl was too tired to walk farther.‎ 这个小女孩太累了，她不能再走路了。‎ ‎◎当从句的主语与主句中的主语不一致，且that从句是否定式时，常用too...for sb to do sth转换。‎ The work is so difficult that we can’t finish it in time.‎ ‎=The work is too difficult for us to finish it in time.‎ 这份工作太难了，我们不能按时完成。‎ ‎◎当从句的主语与主句中的主语一致，且that从句是肯定式时，常用...enough to do sth转换。‎ He is so strong that he can lift the heavy box.‎ ‎=He is strong enough to lift the heavy box.他强壮得足以举起那个重箱子。‎ ‎◎当从句的主语与主句中的主语不一致，且that从句是肯定式时，常用...enough for sb to do sth转换。‎ He spoke so clearly that I could hear him.‎ ‎=He spoke clearly enough for me to hear him.他说得很清楚，我能听明白。‎ 特别提示 so that连在一起使用，意为“为了，以便”，表示目的，此时主句和从句的主语不一定一致；另外，还可以引导结果状语从句，前面一般用逗号。‎ Speak louder so that we can hear you. 说大声点儿，以便我们听得见。‎ She was ill, so that she was unable to go with you. 她病了，不能和你一起去了。‎ ‎(2)convincing 是由动词convince加后缀-ing构成的形容词，意为“令人信服的、有说服力的”，主语通常由表示物体的词来担任。‎ His speech was very convincing. 他的演讲非常有说服力。‎ ‎◎convince是及物动词，表示“使……信服”，“使……确信”。‎ You have convinced me that I should go.你已经说服了我，我应该去。‎ 短语链语 convince sb of sth“使某人相信某事”‎ 特别提示 convinced作形容词时，表示“坚定不移的、有坚定信仰的”，在句中用作定语，其主语是人。‎ Mr Smith is a convinced Christian. 史密斯先生是一个虔诚的基督徒。‎ ‎（3）短语动词set off在本句中是“引起、激起”的意思。‎ A letter from home set off an attack of homesickness. ‎ 一封家信激起了一片思乡之情。‎ 特别提示 set off在作“出发、动身”解时,与set out意思相同。‎ It was raining when we set off/out. 我们出发时,天还下着雨。‎ ‎9. One April Fool’s day, a reporter in England announced that there would be no more spaghetti because the spaghetti farmers in Italy had stopped growing spaghetti. (P80)一个愚人节，有位英国记者宣称以后不会再有意大利式细面条可以吃了，因为意大利的农民已经停止种植生产细面条的植物了。‎ ‎(1)there would be是there be的过去将来时，也可表示为“there was going to be”或“there were going to be”，意为“过去将有”。‎ 知识拓展 过去将来时由“助动词would/should+动词原形”构成，表示从过去某个时间看将来要发生的动作或存在的状态，常运用于宾语从句中。‎ The students didn’t know where they would go tomorrow.‎ 同学们不知道明天要去哪儿。‎ Nobody knew where he would go. 没人知道他要去哪里。‎ ‎◎过去将来时也常可用“助动词was/were+going to+动词原形”表示。‎ She said that she was going to speak at the meeting.她说她要在大会上发言。‎ Li Ping said that she was going to visit her aunt in the town the next Sunday.‎ 李萍说她下个星期日要去拜访住在城里的婶婶。‎ 特别提示 表示位置移动的动词如come, leave, fly, go, arrive等，常用过去进行时表示一个当时按计划或安排近期将要发生的动作。‎ He didn’t say when he was coming here. 他没有说什么时候要来这里。‎ She told me that she was leaving for Shanghai next week.‎ 她告诉我说她下周要动身去上海。‎ ‎ （2）本句中的farmer意为“农夫、农场主、经营农业者”，主要指经营农场的人，主要用于英国、澳大利亚、加拿大、新西兰、美国等，因为这些国家的农业以农场经营为主。‎ Are you a farmer? 你是个农民吗？‎ 特别提示 peasant意为“农民”，常指非英语国家的雇农、佃农或自耕农。在我们国家，目前将“农民”都译为peasant。‎ What’s the old peasant saying to them? 那位老农在对他们说什么？‎ ‎10. By the time people realized that the story was a hoax, all of the spaghetti across the country had been bought. (P80)当人们意识到这是一个骗局的时候，全国的意大利面条都已被买完了。‎ have been bought是现在完成时的被动语态，其构成为：has／have been+过去分词。‎ Man-made satellites have been sent up into space by many countries.‎ 人造卫星已被许多国家发射到太空。‎ 特别提示 现在完成时被动语态结构中有两个过去分词，其中has／have为助动词，因此其各种句型转换均应借助于has／have来完成。构成否定句时直接在 has／have后面加not，构成一般疑问句时将has／have提前。‎ Has this bridge been finished? 这座桥竣工了吗？ ‎ His homework hasn’t been finished. 他的家庭作业还没有写完。 ‎ ‎11. A famous TV star once invited his girlfriend onto his show ‎ on April Fool’s Day. (P80)从前，有位著名的电视明星在愚人节那天邀请他的女友参加他的演出。‎ 本句中的show用作名词，表示“演出”，“展览”。‎ The show begins at eight o’clock. 演出8点钟开始。‎ There is going to be an art show next week. 下周有一个美术展览。‎ 知识拓展 show作动词时，表示“给……看”，“出示……”。‎ He showed his ticket at the door.他在门口出示了门票。‎ 短语链语 on show表示“展览、陈列”，相当于on display。‎ ‎12. She was thrilled, because she really wanted to get married. (P80)她很激动，因为她真的想结婚。‎ ‎(1)thrilled是形容词，意为“非常激动的、非常兴奋的”，常用来说明一个人的心情。‎ He was thrilled when he heard the news. 他听到这个消息时很激动。‎ She was thrilled and shy when she heard “I love you” from her boy friend. ‎ 当她听到她男朋友说“我爱你”的时候，她很激动也很害羞。‎ ‎(2)get married是固定短语，意为“结婚”，表示动作；而be married表示状态，意为“结婚了”，这两个短语都可以和介词to连用。‎ She’s married to my brother. 她嫁给了我哥哥。‎ They’re saving up to get married. 他们储蓄准备结婚。‎ 魔力纠错 他和我的一个朋友结了婚。‎ 误：He was married with a friend of mine. ‎ 正：He was married to a friend of mine.‎ 魔力解析 当表示“与……结婚”时，marry用作及物动词，其后接介词to，而不能用with。‎ 特别提示 marry是短暂性动词，当表示“结婚多长时间”时，要用be married。‎ Lucy married Robert two years ago. ‎ ‎= Lucy has been married to Robert for two years. ‎ ‎=It is two years since Lucy married Robert.‎ ‎=Two years have passed since Lucy married Robert. 露茜和罗伯特结婚两年了。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎问某人“婚否”时应说Are you married?或Is he married？等；如果“未婚”，可以说I’m single.。‎ ‎◎问某人“何时结的婚”应说When were you married?或When did you get married?。‎ Unit 11 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?（P86） 请问洗手间在哪里？‎ 本句是问路或问处所的常用语，通常应先说excuse me，以引起对方注意，也表示尊重对方。‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me where Xianfeng Middle School is?‎ 打扰了。请问先锋中学在哪儿？‎ 知识拓展 问路的表示法 英语中表达问路或处所的句式有不少，下面介绍几种常用的问路的方法。‎ 试译：打扰了。请问去书店怎么走？‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me the way to the bookshop?‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me how I can get to the bookshop?‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me how to get to the bookshop?‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me where the bookshop is?‎ Excuse me. Which is the way to the bookshop, please?‎ Excuse me. Where’s the bookshop, please?‎ Excuse me. How can I get to the bookshop, please?‎ ‎2. ...because my friends hang out there. (P88)……‎ 因为我的朋友都在那儿闲逛。‎ hang out常用于美语口语中，意为“闲逛”。还可以表示“常去某处”的意思。‎ Where do you hang out these days?这些日子你们都在什么地方闲逛来着？‎ 知识拓展 动词hang是“悬挂”，“吊”，“吊死”等意思。可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词。‎ He remained hanging in mid-air, saved by the belt.‎ 他吊在半空中，安全带救了他。‎ A full moon hung in the sky on Mid-autumn Day.‎ 中秋那天，一轮圆月挂在天空。‎ The last Ming emperor hanged himself from this tree.‎ 明朝最后一个皇帝就是在这棵树上吊死的。‎ 特别提示 同学们可能已经注意到，以上句子中的动词过去式用的不同。hang表示“悬挂”，“吊”的意思时，是不规则动词，过去式和过去分词形式是hung，而意为“吊死”时，是规则动词。魔力纠错 ‎① 同学们把一幅世界地图挂在左边墙上。‎ 误：The students hanged a map of the world on the wall to the left.‎ 正：The students hung a map of the world on the wall to the ‎ left.‎ ‎② 总有一天恐怖分子将被人民处以绞刑。‎ 误：The terrorists will be hung by the people some day.‎ 正：The terrorists will be hanged by the people some day.‎ ‎3. There’s always something happening.(P88)总是有事情发生。‎ 本句是there be句型的一个固定结构，即there be+sb/sth+doing sth，意为“有……在做……”。‎ My friend said there was a truck collecting rubbish outside.‎ 我的朋友说外面有一辆卡车正在收集垃圾。‎ There is a Mr Wang waiting to see you outside your office.‎ 有一个姓王的人在门外等着要见你。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎ there be+sb/sth+to do sth，表示“主语将做某事”。‎ There will be some Australian students to come to our class.‎ 有几个澳大利亚的学生要到我们班里来。‎ ‎◎ there be也可不表示“存在”意义，常以否定句的形式出现时，用于对某一具体行为和抽象概念的否定，其句型是there is+no+doing sth。‎ There is no saying what may happen. 很难说会发生什么事。‎ There is no telling when he will return. 说不清他何时回来。‎ There is no knowing when we shall meet again. 不知何时我们能再相会。‎ ‎4. I also like to look at books in the bookstore. (P88)我也喜欢在书店里看书。‎ 汉语的“看书”既可表示“阅读”的意思，也可表示“翻看一下”，“随便看看”。英语的表达在词语上就有所不同了。请“看”区别。‎ He looks at that book, takes it down and reads it carefully. ‎ 他看了看那本书，然后拿下来，认真地读了起来。‎ looks at that book与read it(the book)在内容上是完全不同的。look at that book仅指“看书”，用来表示“看了看”，不是以阅读为目的；而read it(the book)则是“读了读”书中的内容。‎ ‎5. Go past the park, and turn left onto Oak Street. (P88)走过公园，然后向左拐到橡树街。‎ go past the park...是一种指路方式，go past表示“走过”的意思，past是介词，意为“途经”，“经过”。‎ When she went past the parking, Mary saw a man standing at a new car. ‎ 当玛丽走过停车场时，看见一个人站在一辆新车旁。‎ ‎【友情链接】常见的指路表达式有：‎ Walk along/down this road, and take the first crossing on the right.‎ 沿着这条路向前走，在第一个十字路口向右拐。‎ Go along this street, and turn right.顺着这条路向前走，然后向右拐。‎ Walk on and turn left, and you will see the tall building on the right.‎ 继续向前走，然后左拐，在右边你就会看见那栋高楼了。‎ Go along/down this street to the traffic lights, and turn left.‎ 沿着这条路向前走，一直到交通灯处，然后向左拐。‎ ‎6. ...and eat at Uncle Bob’s. (P90)……在鲍伯叔叔的小店吃饭。‎ 当名词表示店铺、办公室或某人的家时，名词所有格所修饰的名词常常省去。‎ Uncle Bob’s是名词“‘s”所有格的一种特殊用法。在表示店铺，餐馆，某种职业，某人的家等名词的所有格后面的名词，常可以省略。如at the doctor’s=at the doctor’s clinic“在大夫的诊所”； at Mr Green’s=at Mr Green’s home“在格林先生家里”。‎ 特别提示 在表示店铺、场所及姓氏的名词前，要用定冠词the，在表示称呼语的名词前，要加物主代词。‎ ‎7. They have organized games and the staff dressed up as clowns. (P90)他们组织游戏活动，工作人员打扮成小丑的模样。‎ ‎◎dress作为及物动词，指穿衣服的动作，后面不用表示衣服的名词作宾语，但可用指人的名词或代词作宾语，表示给某人穿衣服。‎ She dressed her children quickly.她很快给孩子们穿上衣服。‎ ‎◎dress的过去分词dressed与get连用表示“穿上衣服”。‎ Let’s get dressed and leave at once.咱们穿好衣服马上出发。‎ ‎◎dress up是“化装”，“穿上盛装”，“打扮”的意思。‎ They all dressed up as PLA men.他们都打扮成解放军的模样。‎ She likes to dress up for a party.她喜欢把自己打扮得漂漂亮亮去参加晚会。‎ ‎8. make a telephone call(P86)打个电话 Mr Tan makes the best noodles in town. (P91)谭先生是镇上面条做得最好的。‎ make是英语中非常活跃的一个单词。‎ ‎◎ 用于打电话。第一句中的make后接表示电话的词语，是“打电话”的意思。make a telephone call相当于动词call, ring, phone, telephone等。‎ 试译：我给格林先生打个电话。‎ ‎① I call/ring/phone/telephone Mr Green.‎ ‎② I call/ring/phone Mr Green up.‎ ‎③ I give Mr Green a ring/call.‎ ‎④ I make a telephone call to Mr Green.‎ ‎◎ 表示“做”，“制作”。第二句中的make表示“（用材料或零件）做，制作，制造，建造或创造某物”，其所制造的产品通常是由一个或几个部分组成的。‎ Mother made a big cake for Michael on his birthday.‎ 妈妈为迈克尔生日做了一个大蛋糕。‎ The workers are making cars in the factory.‎ ‎ 工人们在工厂里生产汽车。‎ He is good at making toy cars. 他擅长做儿童玩具。‎ ‎【友情链接】make还有一个重要用法，表示“使”的意思，在历年的中考中都有它的考点。这一用法主要掌握两点：（1）在主动语态中，后接不定式作宾语补足语时要省去to；（2）在被动语态中后接不定式作主语补足语时，一定要加上to。‎ The boss made his employees work two more hours.‎ 老板使他的雇员又工作了两个小时。‎ Maria was made to leave the company.玛丽亚被迫离开了公司。‎ ‎9. ...“Excuse me, I wonder if you can help me.”(P92)……“打扰了，我不知道您是否能帮帮我”。‎ 动词wonder在不同的句子结构中表达的意思不同：‎ ‎(1)后接“who, what, why等疑问词引导的宾语从句”，“疑问词+不定式”时，表示“想知道”。‎ The teacher wondered why she was late.老师想知道她为什么迟到。‎ He wondered what happened.他想知道发生了什么事情。‎ I’m just wondering how to do it.我正想知道怎么做那件事。‎ ‎(2）后接“that引导的宾语从句”，“不定式短语”时，表示“感到惊奇，对……感到惊讶”。‎ I wonder that he was off office.我对他下岗感到惊讶。‎ I wonder to see her looking so cheerful. 我很惊讶地发现她如此高兴。‎ ‎(3)后接if或whether引导的宾语从句时，表示一种委婉的请求或疑问。‎ I wonder if you would mind giving me a hand.‎ 我不知道你是否能帮我一下。‎ She wondered whether you were free that morning.‎ 她不知道那天上午你是否有空。‎ Unit 12 You’re supposed to shake hands.‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. You’re supposed to shake hands.(P94)你们应该握手。‎ be supposed to用来表示根据规定或按照法律人们不得不做的事，或期待将要发生的事，与should相似，后面也是接动词原形。否定形式在be动词后加not，常表示禁止做某事。‎ We’re supposed to make no noise in class. 在课堂上我们不该发出噪音。‎ We’re supposed to start work at 8∶00 every morning.‎ 我们应该每天早晨八点开始工作。‎ ‎2. Spending time with family and friends is very important to us. (P96)与家人和朋友共度时光对我们非常重要。‎ Spending time with family and friends 是动名词短语，在本句中作主语。动名词（短语）作主语时，谓语动词要用第三人称单数形式。如果是并列的动名词（短语）作主句时，谓语动词用复数形式。‎ Reading in bed is not good for your eyes.‎ ‎ 在床上看书对眼睛不好。‎ Reading and writing take me a lot of time. 读书写作花了我不少时间。‎ 不定式（短语）也可作主语，两者的区别在“语法天地”中有详解。‎ ‎3. We’re the land of watches, after all! (P96)毕竟我们是手表的国度。‎ 句中的land意为“国土”，“国家”。它还可以表示 “陆地”，与河流和海洋相对；也可以表示“土地”，可耕种的田地就叫做land。‎ We traveled by land until we reached the sea.我们沿陆路旅行，直到看见大海。‎ All the waste land in this area has been opened up.这个地区的荒地全被开垦了。‎ 知识拓展 与“土地”，“地”相关的词语还有earth, soil和ground。‎ ‎◎ earth意为“地”，“地球”，“泥土”。它着重指“大地”，区别于“天空”。‎ The earth moves round the sun.地球围绕太阳转。‎ ‎◎ soil意为“土地”，“土壤”，尤指生长植物的土地。‎ The soil is very thin in the forest.森林里土层非常薄。‎ ‎◎ ground意为“地”，“地面”，主要指大地表面。不论是泥地，沙地或水泥地，均可用这个词表示；也可以用来指运动场地。‎ The ground is covered with leaves in the ‎ woods.树林里的地面上落满了树叶。‎ ‎4. You’re not supposed to make noise while eating noodles. (P97)吃面条的时候你不应该弄出响声来。‎ 句中的while eating noodles是while接从句的省略形式，该句完整形式是while you are eating noodles。由while和when引导的时间状语从句，如果主语和主句的主语相同，从句中的主语和be动词常可省略。‎ While/When (she was)leaving the house, she was heard to make some commonplace remark to her husband.有人听到她在离开房间时同他的丈夫寒暄。‎ ‎5. It’s rude to point at anyone with your chopsticks. (P97)用筷子指着别人是无礼的。‎ 本句是主系表结构，不定式短语是真正的主语，it是形式主语。句中point意为“指”，“指向”，常构成短语point at, point to和point out。‎ ‎◎point to和point at都含有“指着”的意思，两者一般可以互换。‎ The teacher is pointing at/to the map on the wall.老师指着墙上的地图。‎ ‎◎但主语是事物时，一般用point to作谓语。point at可以分开使用，即point后直接跟名词或代词作宾语，再跟介词at表示方向，意为“把……指向”，而point to却不能分开使用。‎ The soldier pointed his gun at the doctor.士兵用枪指着医生。‎ ‎◎point out意为“指出”，其中out是副词。如果它后面的宾语是代词，则必须把该宾语放在out之前。‎ Please point out the mistakes in my composition.请指出我作文中的错误。‎ Luckily， the man knew Mr Green and pointed him out to us.‎ 幸好这个人认识格林先生，于是便把他指给我们看。‎ ‎6. Although I still make lots of mistakes, it doesn’t bother me like it used to. (P98)虽然我还是出了不少错，但它（法语）不像以前那样让我烦恼。‎ ‎（1）mistake意为“错误”，“过失”，可数名词，常指由于认识，理解或判断上的失误造成行为或看法上的错误，也指因粗心，疏忽，技术不熟练等而犯的错误。通常与make连用构成make mistakes/a mistake“出错”，“犯错误”。‎ Anyone can make a mistake. 人人都会犯错误。‎ He only made two mistakes in grammar today. 他今天只犯了两个语法错误。‎ ‎（2）bother 意思是“烦扰，打扰”，常用作及物动词。‎ Hot weather bothers me. 炎热的天气使我烦恼。‎ ‎7. I find it difficult to remember everything, but I’m gradually getting used to things, and don’t find them so strange any more. (P98)我发现将这一切全记住很难，但慢慢就对这些东西习惯了，也就不再觉得它们很怪异了。‎ ‎（1）find it difficult to remember everything中的it是形式宾语，动词不定式短语是真正的宾语，形容词difficult是宾补。‎ I found it hard to do the work all by myself.我发现独自一人干这活很难。‎ I think it useful to read English in the morning. 我认为早晨读英语很有用。‎ ‎（2）be used to sth/doing(sth)是中学英语学习中的重点、难点，也是中考考点。常与used to do sth和be used to do sth一起进行考查。‎ ‎◎be used to是“习惯于”的意思，可用于各种时态。其中to是介词，后面接名词、代词或动词-ing形式。‎ She isn’t used to living in the country.她不习惯住在乡下。‎ We’ve been used to hard work.我们已经习惯干累活了。‎ ‎◎强调界限性的状态，说明从不习惯到习惯时，常在used前面用get或become代替be。这种现象尤其常见于将来时态和完成时态中。‎ You will soon get used to the weather here.你很快就会习惯这里的天气的。‎ ‎◎有时be used to do是动词use的被动语态形式，意为“被用来……”。在这种结构里，to是动词不定式符号。‎ Man-made satellites are used to send and receive TV programs.‎ 人造卫星用来发射和接收电视节目。‎ Steel may be used to make machines.钢可以用来制造机器。‎ ‎8. Questions crowded my mind. (P99)我的脑海涌现出一些疑问。‎ crowd表示“大量涌入”，在此句中的crowd是比喻用法， 含义是“涌入”。‎ Disturbing thoughts crowded into my mind. 我心乱如麻。‎ Tourists crowded the beach. 游客挤满了海滩。‎ ‎9. ...your teachers will not be pleased if you write e-mail English in a test!(P101)……如果你在测试中用电子邮件英语老师会不高兴的。‎ please“使高兴”，相关词语有pleased, pleasure与pleasant。‎ Does the cloth please you?这布料合你的意吗？‎ The Emperor was pleased by what the Minister told him about the cloth.‎ 听了大臣关于布料的禀报，皇帝非常高兴。‎ ‎【友情链接】这四个词都有“满意”，“高兴”的意思，但词性和用法不相同。‎ ‎◎ please是动词，可用作及物动词或不及物动词，表示“（使）高兴，满意，愉快”。‎ ‎◎ pleased是过去分词，意为“感到高兴（满意）”，其作用相当于形容词，常与be连用，后接介词at, with, by等引起的短语，还可接动词不定式或that从句。‎ ‎◎ pleasure是名词，表示“高兴”，“快乐”，“娱乐”‎ 时，为不可数名词；表示“乐趣，高兴的事”时，为可数名词。如：It is one of my greatest pleasures.它是我最大的乐趣之一。‎ ‎◎pleasant是形容词，意为“使人感到愉快（满意）”，一般用作定语。如主语指物，也可用作表语。‎ ‎ 10. seat与 sit“坐”不同 ‎◎ seat通常用作及物动词，与反身代词连用，或用be seated这一形式（这种用法不如sit普通），seat还可作“能坐……人”解，主语往往是地方。‎ Be seated, everybody!大家请坐吧。‎ That cinema can seat 2,000 people.那家电影院能坐两千人。‎ ‎◎ sit通常作不及物动词，不需要宾语。‎ In the bus we sat together.在公共汽车里我们坐在一起。人教版新目标英语9年级unit7-9‎ Unit 7 Where would you like to visit?‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. Where would you like to go on vacation, Sam? (P52)山姆，你想去哪儿度假呀？‎ ‎(1)go on是不及物动词词组，意为“继续”，其后不能跟名词或代词作宾语。‎ The teacher asked him to stop talking, but he still went on.‎ 老师叫他别讲，可他还是讲个不停 ‎◎go on后面可以接动词不定式或动词-ing形式，但它们的意义不同。‎ Let’s go on discussing the question. 咱们继续谈论这个问题吧。‎ Let’s go on to discuss the question. 咱们接着谈论另外一个问题吧。‎ 短语链语 go on with表示“继续”，后面可直接跟名词或代词作宾语。‎ Then Miss Gao went back to her desk and went on with the lesson.‎ 然后高老师回到讲桌后边，继续上课。‎ ‎◎go on with可与go on doing sth 互换。‎ Go on with your work(=Go on doing your work).继续做你的工作去吧。‎ 特别提示 holiday还可以用来表示“节日”，“纪念日”。‎ Everyone was in his holiday clothes. 人人都穿上了节日的盛装。‎ ‎2. v-ing型形容词和v-ed型形容词 本单元出现了大量v-ing型形容词，那么大家对它的用法熟悉吗？在英语中，某些动词的后面加上-ing或-ed，可以变成形容词。‎ v-ing型形容词具有主动或进行的含义，是人或物本身所具有的品质。常见的词有：‎ surprise—surprising 令人惊奇的 excite—exciting令人兴奋的 bore—boring 令人讨厌的 interest—interesting 有趣的 develop—developing 发展中的 move—moving 感人的 inspire—inspiring 鼓舞人心的 v-ed型形容词具有被动或已完成的含义，是由于受到某种影响而产生的结果。常见的词有：‎ surprise—surprised感到惊奇的 bore—bored 感到厌恶的 excite—excited 感到兴奋的 interest—interested感兴趣的 develop—developed 发达的 move—moved 受感动的 inspire—inspired受到鼓舞的 please—pleased 高兴的 ‎3. For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris? (P54)下一次假期为什么不考虑去巴黎呢？‎ ‎(1)Why not+动词原形相当于Why don’t you+动词原形，表示“为什么不……”，常用来向别人提建议。‎ Why not study hard? 为什么不努力学习？‎ Why don’t you ask the policeman for help? 怎么不向那个警察寻求帮助呢？‎ ‎(2)consider 表示“考虑，细想”，相当于think about，后面接动词时，应用动词的-ing形式。‎ I first considered writing to him, but then decided to see him. ‎ 我开始想写信给他，但后来决定去见他。‎ ‎4. Paris is the capital of France, and is one of the liveliest cities in Europe. (P54)巴黎是法国的首都，是欧洲最活跃的城市之一。‎ lively是形容词，意为“活泼的，活跃的，有生气的”，在句中作定语或表语，用来修饰人或物。‎ She is a lively girl. 她是个活泼的女孩。‎ The sports ground is lively with all sorts of ball games.‎ 运动场上要进行各种球类比赛，呈现出一派生气勃勃的景象。‎ 特别提示 ‎◎alive作形容词，意为“活着的，在世的”，常作表语，但有时也作后置定语或补语。‎ He must be alive, for he is still breathing slightly. ‎ 他一定还活着，因为他还在轻微呼吸。‎ He is the only person alive in the accident. 他是这次事故中惟一活下来的人。‎ An enemy officer was caught alive. 一名敌人军官被活捉了。‎ ‎◎living是形容词，意为“活着的”，常位于名词之前或之后作定语；作表语时与alive意思相同。‎ We now know there are no living things on the moon. ‎ 我们现在知道月球上没有生物。‎ Is his grandfather still living/alive? 他的祖父还活着吗？‎ ‎◎live读作/laiv/时，也作形容词，意为“活着的”，常放在名词之前作定语，它一般不用来修饰人；live读/liv/时，是动词，意为“生活，生存”。‎ The cat was playing with a live mouse. 这只猫在玩弄一只活老鼠。‎ Pandas usually live in the south and the southeast of China.‎ 熊猫通常生活在中国的南部和东南部。‎ ‎5. It doesn’t have any beaches or mountains, but there are still many things to do there. (P54)它没有沙滩和山脉，但是在那儿仍然有很多的事情可做。‎ 在本句中连词or连接两个被否定的并列成分。‎ The world’s favorite food isn’t English, Italian, Indian or Japanese, but it’s American fast food. 世界上最受欢迎的食品不是英国食品、意大利食品、印度食品和日本食品，而是美国快餐。‎ 魔力纠错 他没有弟弟, 也没有妹妹。‎ 误：He has no brothers and sisters.‎ 正：He has no brothers or sisters.‎ 魔力解析 在否定句，or是“也不”的意思，而and表示的却是肯定的意义。因此，上句还可以写为He has no brothers and no sisters。‎ 知识拓展 连词or在“祈使句+or+简单句”句型中, 表示“否则，不然”，引出一个相反的结果，本句型可以转换为含否定的if从句。‎ Get up early, or you’ll be late for school.‎ ‎→If you don’t get up early, you’ll be late for school.早点起，否则你就会迟到。‎ 短语链语 ‎◎either...or表示“不是……，就是……”；“或者……，或者……”。‎ Either you or I am right. 不是你对就是我对。‎ ‎◎sooner or later意为“迟早”。‎ Don’t worry. Sooner or later, we can speak English well.‎ 别担心，迟早我们能说好英语。‎ ‎6. ...including the Eiffel Tower and Notre Dame Cathedral, one of the most famous churches in the world. (P54)……包括埃菲尔铁塔和巴黎圣母院，世界上最著名的教堂之一。‎ ‎(1)本句中的include意为“包括”，“连……在内”，指包括或容纳某东西成为整体的一部分，侧重于对比整体与部分。‎ The money I gave you includes Xiao Wang’s. 我给你的钱里包括了小王的。‎ The coins included examples of almost all the types of Chinese coin. ‎ 这些硬币包括了几乎所有的中国硬币的品种。‎ 特别提示 contain意为“含有，包含，里面装有”，指某物容纳比其更小的东西，侧重所含的量与成分。‎ The basket contains a variety of fruits. 这个篮子里装有各种水果。‎ These foods should contain some fat, some fiber, a little salt ‎ and so on. ‎ 这些食物应该含有一些脂肪、纤维，还应该有一点盐等等。‎ ‎(2)本句中的famous 是形容词，常用于be famous as或be famous for结构中，意为“因……而闻名”。‎ ‎◎当主语是表示人的名词时，be famous as表示“以某种身份而出名”，be famous for表示“以某种知识、技能或作品而出名”。‎ Einstein was famous as a great scientist. 爱因斯坦以一位伟大的科学家而著名。‎ Einstein was famous for his Theory of Relativity. 爱因斯坦以他的相对论而著名。‎ ‎7. Isn’t it supposed to be very hot? (P54)难道天气不应该是很热的吗？‎ ‎(1)这是一个否定形式的一般疑问句，用来表示说话人提出自己的建议或看法，并希望得到对方肯定的答复。有时它也表示惊讶、不相信、挖苦、批评等意义，其构成是：Isn’t(Aren’t, Don’t, Won’t, Can’t, Couldn’t, Didn’t, Haven’t, Hasn’t等)+主语？‎ Isn’t he a League member? 难道他不是团员吗？‎ Haven’t you known him yet? I saw you having dinner with him just now.‎ 你难道还不认识他吗？刚才我还见你和他一起吃饭了呢。‎ ‎(2)be supposed to 的意思与should近似，意为“被期望或被要求做某事”。‎ Am I supposed to clean all the rooms or the single one? ‎ 我是应该打扫所有房间还是这个单间？‎ You’re supposed to start work at 8∶30 every morning. ‎ 你应该每天早晨八点半开始工作。‎ ‎8. My family and I want to take a trip this summer somewhere in the east of China. (P56)今年夏天，我和家人想到中国东部的某个地方去旅行。‎ ‎(1)名词trip指短距离的旅行，常含有回到原出发地之意。有时在口语中也指远程旅行，这时可与journey替换。‎ Have a good trip. 一路顺风。‎ During the four-hour trip, he wandered from car to car.‎ 在四小时的旅途中，他在各个车厢之间逛来逛去。‎ ‎9. I hope you can provide me with some information about the kinds of vacations that your firm can offer. (P56)我希望你能给我提供一些贵公司能提供的各种假期旅游的信息。‎ ‎(1)provide 作动词，表示“供应，供给;预先约定”，可作及物动词，也可作不及物动词。 ‎ The farm provided them all the food they needed.‎ 农场提供他们所需要的全部食物。‎ ‎(2)firm表示“公司，商号，商行”等意思，常指商行，不用于商号名称。‎ He is thinking of starting another firm in Paris. ‎ 他正在考虑在巴黎另开一家公司。‎ 特别提示 offer可作名词，意为“提供，提议，提出”，后面接名词或动词不定式作宾语。‎ He offered me a glass of wine. 他给了我一杯酒。‎ The driver offered to drive us to the station. ‎ 那位司机主动提出送我们去火车站。‎ ‎10. It would be nice if our hotel had rooms with kitchens so we could save money by cooking our own meals. (P56)如果我们住的宾馆房间带有厨房那就太好了，那样的话我们可以自己做饭，也就节省钱了。‎ ‎(1)with kitchens是介词短语，在句中作定语修饰rooms。with在这里意为“具有，带有”，由其连接的介词短语在句中作定语修饰名词，常用以说明人或物的特征；作状语时，表示一个伴随状态。‎ Mrs Smith is a woman with big eyes and long hair.‎ 史密斯太太是一位大眼睛、长头发的妇女。‎ ‎（2）动词save 在本句中是“节省”的意思。‎ If you want to save time, you’d better make a list before you go shopping.‎ 如果你想节省时间，去买东西之前，先列一张购物清单。‎ 知识拓展 save还有“拯救”，“抢救”，“搭救”；“储存”，“保存”等多种意思。‎ A lot of land has been saved by the Great Green Wall.‎ 绿色长城拯救了许多土地。‎ My father saved a lot of money in the bank. ‎ 我父亲在银行里存了许多钱。‎ ‎11. We all dream about things that we would like to do, and things we hope to achieve in the future. (P58) 我们都梦想着自己想要做的事情，以及我们希望将来要实现的事情。‎ 本句中的in the future意为“将来，未来”，即in the time yet to come。‎ Who can tell what will happen in the future? ‎ 谁能知道将来会发生什么？‎ In the future, shopping can be done by videophone. ‎ 在将来，购买东西能在可视电话中进行。‎ 特别提示 in future意为“今后”，相当于from now on。‎ In future, be more careful with your spelling. ‎ 今后你要更加注意你的拼写。‎ I advise you not to eat fruit that isn’t ripe in future.‎ 我劝你今后不要吃不熟的水果。‎ ‎12. According to the survey, less realistic dreams are also common... (P58)根据调查得知，不现实的梦想也很普遍……。‎ 本句中的common意为“普通的”，“常见的”，“不足为奇的”‎ ‎，有时常发生，对每个人、每个地方都普遍的意思。‎ Snow is common in cold countries. 在寒冷的国家，下雪是常见的事情。‎ 特别提示 usual意为“平常的”，“通常的”，指在某一地方、某一时间或某一人身上所常见的，往往指常用的东西或常发生的事情。‎ We followed the usual method of test.我们采用了通常的测试方法。‎ Unit 8 I’llhelp clean up the city parks.‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. I’d like to help homeless people. (P60)我想帮助无家可归的人。‎ homeless是形容词，意为“无家可归的”，由home+后缀-less构成。‎ 特别提示 less后缀通常加在名词的后面，构成形容词，表示与原来名词意思相反的形容词，如groundless 无根据的， odorless 无气味的, careless粗心的，useless无用的。‎ ‎2. You could help clean up the city parks. (P60)你可以帮着打扫城市公园。‎ ‎◎clean up是“清除、除去（垃圾、污物）”等，使地方干净。‎ Please clean up the room after the party. 聚会后把房间打扫干净。‎ We should clean up the dirty parts of the sea.‎ 我们应该清除海里的污染部分。‎ ‎◎clean up还可以表示“挣得，赢得（多少钱）”。‎ He cleaned up a small fortune. 他发了一笔小财。‎ 特别提示 clean oneself up意为“洗干净”。‎ Your hands are dirty, you’d better clean yourself up.‎ 你的手脏了，你应该洗洗它们。 ‎ ‎3. You could give out food at a food bank. (P60)你可以在食品供应站分发食品。‎ give out在这里是“分发”，“散发”的意思。‎ Our English teacher gave out the examination papers when the bell rang. ‎ 我们的英语老师在铃响的时候分发试卷。‎ ‎◎另外一个意思为“用完”，“消耗尽”。‎ After a week their food supplies gave out. 一周之后，他们的食物供应用完了。‎ ‎◎还有一个意思为“发出”，“送出”。‎ The sun gives out a lot of heat. 太阳能发出热量。‎ ‎4. He looks sad. Let’s cheer him up.(P61)他看上去很伤心。我们去帮他振作起来吧。‎ cheer up sb或cheer sb up意为“（使某人）高兴起来，振作起来”。如果是代词做宾语，则将代词放在中间。‎ Cheer up! The news isn’t too bad. 不要发愁啦，这消息不错嘛！‎ He took her to the ballet to cheer her up. ‎ 他为了使她高兴起来，便带她去看芭蕾舞。‎ ‎5. This volunteer work takes each of them several hours a week, so it is a major commitment. (P62)这份义工每周花了他们每个人好几个小时的时间，所以这是一个重大的贡献。‎ ‎(1)each of them是指“他们中的每一个”。如果做主语，则谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。‎ 知识拓展 each与every的用法 ‎◎each指一个整体中的每一个，强调个体；every着重于全体的总和，强调整体。试比较：‎ Each has a different book. （强调各有不同。）‎ Here every child at the age of six can go to school. （侧重整体，无一例外。）‎ ‎◎each可作形容词及代词，而every只能作形容词，但可与-one，-body，-thing等构成复合代词。‎ ‎◎each用在代词或复数名词前要用介词of连接，如each of them, each of the boys; every不能直接跟of连接，如不可以说every of them，而要说every one of them或each of them。‎ ‎◎every还可以表示“每隔”，后接基数词加名词，如every four weeks, every three months等，此种结构中的every不能用each代替。‎ She had a rest every fives minutes. 她每隔5分钟就休息一会儿。‎ 魔力纠错 ‎①街道两旁有许多商店。‎ 误：There are many shops on every side of the street.‎ 正：There are many shops on each side of the street.‎ 魔力解析 each可以用来指两个或两个以上的人或物，但是every却总是指三个或三个以上的人或物，不能指两者。‎ ‎6. Not only do I feel good about helping other people, but I get to spend time doing what I love to do. (P62)我不仅对帮助别人感到很满足，而且我还渐渐地花时间做自己喜爱做的事情。‎ ‎(1)not only ... but also (also可省略)是“不但……而且……”的意思，当置于句首时，not only后面从句的主谓要倒装，但but （also）后面的主谓不用倒装。‎ Not only has he been to Canada, but (also) he knows some Canadians.‎ 他不仅去过加拿大，而且还认识许多加拿大人。‎ Not only did he teach at school, but (also) he wrote novels.‎ 他不仅在学校里教书，而且还写小说。‎ ‎7. “Don’t put it off,” says HuiPing. “Become a volunteer today!” (P62) “别犹豫”，慧萍说，“今天就来当一名自愿者吧！”‎ ‎(1)put off 意思是“推迟，拖延”。‎ Never put off till tomorrow what may be done today. 今日事今日毕。‎ They put off the soccer game because of the rain. ‎ 因为下雨，他们把球赛推迟了。‎ You should not put off going to see the doctor. 你不应该拖延去看医生。‎ ‎◎put off还可意为“关掉”，相当于turn off。‎ Please put off the lights before you leave the classroom.‎ 在你离开教室之前，请关掉灯。‎ ‎(2)become是系动词，表示“变成，成为”，后面接名词、形容词、过去分词等。‎ She became famous in her city. 她在她所在城市的成为名人了。‎ 知识拓展 become后可接介词of，构成what becomes of sb/sth 表示“某人/某事进展如何”。‎ What became of the dreams of our youth? 我们年轻时的理想何在？‎ 特别提示 系动词get, turn , grow和become都可表示“变得，感到”，其区别是：‎ ‎◎get用于日常用语，后面常跟比较级。‎ The weather gets colder, and the days get shorter. ‎ 天气变冷了，白天变短了。 ‎ ‎◎turn指在颜色和性质等方面变得与原来不同。‎ His face turned red. 他的脸变红了。‎ ‎◎grow着重变化过程。‎ It’s growing dark. 天渐渐地变黑了。‎ ‎◎become是指身份、职位的变化，作瞬间动词时，指状态的变化。‎ He became an artist. 他成为了一名艺术家。‎ ‎8. Jimmy takes after his mother. (P63)吉米的言行举止像他妈妈。‎ 本句中的take after sb 表示“长相或举止像（某个长辈）”，不能用于被动语态。‎ To my surprise, Jack doesn’t take after his father at all.‎ 令我惊奇的是，杰克和他爸爸长的一点儿也不像。‎ Mary really takes after her mother, she has the same eyes, nose, and hair. ‎ 玛丽长得真像她妈妈，眼睛、鼻子和头发一个样。‎ ‎9. Jimmy has run out of money. (P63)吉米把钱花光了。‎ run out of意为“用完”，其主语通常是人，表示主动含义，后面跟宾语。‎ He has run out of ink.他用完了墨水。‎ I’m afraid we’re run out of petrol.我们的汽油怕是已用完了。‎ 特别提示 run out也是“用完”‎ 的意思，其主语通常是被使用的事物，如时间、金钱、食物等，但不用于被动语态，同时其后也不能跟宾语。‎ His money soon ran out. 他的钱很快就花完了。‎ Have you nearly finished? Time is running out. 你快做完了吗？时间快到了。‎ ‎10. I fix up bikes and give them away. (P63)我修理好自行车，然后捐赠出去。‎ ‎(1)fix up相当于to repair，表示“修理，修补，整理”,其后跟物件名词作宾语。‎ My watch sometimes gains and sometimes loses. Can you fix it up for me? ‎ 我的表有时快，有时慢，你能帮我修修吗？‎ My mother is too old to live on her own, so we’re fixing up the spare room for her. 我母亲年龄太大了，不能自己生活，所以我们正收拾这个多出的房间让她住。‎ 特别提示 如果fix up的宾语是“人”的话，则构成fix sb up with sth句型，表示“为某人安排某件事，向某人提供某物”。‎ I’ll fix you up with a place to stay. 我来给你安排住处。‎ ‎(2)give sth away 意思是“捐赠，赠送”。‎ The rich man gave away most of his money to charity.‎ 那个富人把他的大部分钱都捐给了慈善事业。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎give away还可以表示“分发或赠与某物，由于大意而未利用或抓住（时机，机会等）”。‎ The headmaster gave away the prizes at the school sports day.‎ 校长在学校运动会上颁发了奖品。‎ ‎◎give away还可以表示“有意或无意地泄露某事情或出卖某人”。‎ The woman gave away state secrets to the enemy.‎ 那个妇女把国家机密泄露给了敌人。‎ ‎11. He even handed out advertisements at a local supermarket. (P64)他甚至在当地的一家超市散发广告。‎ hand out意为“散发”，其中hand是动词。‎ The teacher is handing out the maths papers. 老师在发数学试卷。‎ 短语链语 hand in“面交”，“上交”。‎ The students are handing their papers in.学生们在交试卷。‎ ‎12. Then he told the teachers at school about his problem ... (P64)然后他告诉老师自己的问题……‎ tell sb about sth是“把某事告诉某人”的意思，有时表示“嘱咐或语气较轻的命令”，常用于tell sb to do sth结构。‎ The teacher told us about his story. 老师给我们讲了他的故事。‎ My mother usually tells me to be careful on my way to school.‎ 妈妈常常告诉我在去上学的路上一定要小心。‎ ‎13. The strategies that he came up with worked out fine.‎ ‎ (P64)他想到的那些办法获得了成功。‎ ‎(1)这是一个由that引导的定语从句，先行词是前面的strategies。动词短语worked out在这里作主语the strategies的谓语，意为“产生结果，发展为，结果是……”，后面不可接宾语，主语也不用“人”来充当。‎ I wonder how their ideas worked out in practice. ‎ 我很想知道他们的想法在实践中取得了什么结果。‎ We didn’t plan it like that but it worked out very well.‎ 我们原不是那样计划的，但结果却很好。‎ 知识拓展 work out的其它用法 It was the best solution that he was able to work out at this time. ‎ 这是他这时能想出的最好的解决办法了。（想出）‎ I can’t work out the meaning of this poem. 我理解不了这首诗的意思。（理解）‎ 短语链语 ‎◎work on意为“从事”。‎ Professor Green is working on a new book. 格林教授正在写一本新书。‎ He is working on a maths problem. 他正在算一道数学难题。‎ ‎◎work on后面无宾语时，表示继续工作。‎ It’s very late, but they were still working on.‎ 时间很晚了，但他们仍然在继续工作。‎ ‎(2)fine在这里是副词，可与well替换，意思是“好，顺利”。‎ The machine works fine. 这台机器运行很好。‎ Sam is doing fine in his new business. ‎ 萨姆在他的新业务中一切进展顺利。‎ ‎14. ...Who has filled my life with pleasure. (P66)……使我生活充满快乐的人。‎ ‎(1)本句中的fill...with...表示一个动作，意为“用……装满……”，其主语通常是人。‎ He filled the bag with books. 他在书包里装满了书。‎ Please fill the bottle with milk. 请将瓶子装满牛奶。‎ 知识拓展 be filled with表示一个状态，意为“装满了……”，相当于be full of，其主语通常是人或物。‎ The room was filled with smoke. 房间里浓烟弥漫。‎ Her eyes were filled with tears. 她眼睛里充满了泪水。‎ ‎(2)pleasure意为“高兴，快乐”，是不可数名词；表示“乐趣，高兴的事”时是可数名词。‎ Reading gives me great pleasure. 读书给了我很多快乐。‎ It is one of my greatest pleasures. 它是我最大乐趣之一。‎ ‎◎在口语中It’s pleasure. 是回答感谢的客套语。 ‎ ‎—Thank you for your help. 感谢你的帮助。‎ ‎—It’s a pleasure. 不用谢。‎ 特别提示 ‎◎pleased是形容词，意为“自己感到高兴的，欣喜的，满意的”，指以任何方式表现出来或未表现出来的满足与快乐，在句中常用作表语，其主语为人。‎ The two friends were very pleased to see each other again. ‎ 这两个朋友非常高兴再次见面。‎ I was pleased that the manager had decided not to be angry with me. ‎ 使我高兴的是经理已经不再生我的气了。‎ ‎◎pleasant也是形容词，表示“使人感到愉快／满意”，一般用作定语，如主语是物，也可以用作表语。‎ It’s pleasant weather today. 今天的天气令人愉快。‎ It’s very pleasant to sit down after standing for hours.‎ 站了几小时后坐下来很舒服。‎ ‎◎please是动词，表示“（使）高兴，满意，愉快”。‎ Does the cloth please you? 这布料合你的意吗？‎ ‎15. Because I can’t use my arms or legs well, normal things like answering the telephone, opening and shutting doors, or carrying things have always been difficult for me.‎ ‎ (P66)因为我不能灵活地使用我的手和脚，像接电话、开关门、拿东西这样的事情对于我来说都很难。‎ ‎(1)本句中的shut意为“关”，在许多情况下可以与close互换，只是后者语气较弱，如close the door关门（也可能指半开半闭），shut the door关门（指把门关紧）。‎ That shop shuts at eight pm. 那家商店八点钟关门。‎ He closed his speech with a funny joke. 他用一个有趣的笑话结束了演说。‎ ‎◎当表示“关闭公路，铁路或交通工具”或作“结束”讲时，只用close。‎ They have closed the road for thick fog. 由于大雾，那条公路被关闭。‎ 特别提示 turn off用来表示“关闭”有开关的东西，如收音机、电视、煤气、水龙头等。‎ Please turn off the light when you leave the lab. ‎ 在你离开实验室前关掉灯。‎ Make sure the gas is turned off before you go to bed. ‎ 确保上床前把煤气关掉。‎ ‎(2)本句中的carry意为“搬运，携带”，不表示带到什么地方，而携带的方式可以是提、扛、背、抱、抬等。‎ She carried a baby in her arms. 她怀里抱了一个孩子。‎ He was carrying a wooden box on his shoulder.他扛着一个木箱。‎ 特别提示 在后面“Lucky! Fetch my book.”一句中出现的fetch相当于go and bring back，意为“取来，接来”，表示一往一返。‎ Let’s fetch some water. 咱们去打点水来。‎ People had to walk many kilometers in order to fetch wood. ‎ 为了取木料，人们不得不走许多公里路。‎ Unit 9 When was it invented?‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. They’re used for seeing in the dark. (P69)它们被用于在黑夜里观看。‎ be used for表示“被用来做……”，介词for表示目的和用途，后面接名词或动词-ing形式。‎ Wood can be used for making paper.木材可以被用来造纸。‎ 知识拓展 含有be used的常用短语：‎ ‎◎be used as表示“被用作……”，介词as意思是“作为”的意思，其后一般接名词，强调使用的工具及手段。‎ This book can be used as a textbook.这本书可以当作教科书来用。‎ ‎◎be used by表示“被……使用”，by后接动作的执行者。‎ This kind of machine is used by farmers for getting in crops.‎ 农民们用这种机器来收割庄稼。‎ ‎2. I think the most helpful invention is the light bulb. (P70)我认为最有用的发明是灯泡。‎ helpful是由名词help加上-ful后缀构成的形容词，意为“有帮助的”，类似的形容词还有：‎ thank—thankful (感谢的，感激的) grate—grateful(感谢的，感激的)‎ use—useful (有用的) wonder—wonderful(令人惊奇的)‎ forget—forgetful (健忘的) success—successful(成功的)‎ beauty—beautiful (美丽的) pain—painful(疼痛的)‎ ‎3. I’d like to have a radio because I could listen to music all day. (P70)我想有一个收音机，这样我就可以整天听音乐了。‎ 本句中的情态动词could用来表示逻辑上或理论上的可能性，而不是某种实际上将要发生或正在发生的可能性。‎ Anybody could make mistake.任何人都可能犯错误。‎ The weather here could be very cold in winter. 冬天这儿的天气很冷。‎ 特别提示 could也表示人或动物的内在能力，有某种知识或者技能而能够做某事。‎ He hurt his foot and couldn’t play soccer. 他的脚受了伤，所以他不能踢足球了。‎ ‎4. The potato chips were invented by mistake. (P71)土豆条的发明纯属歪打正着。‎ ‎(1) potato chips是一个复合名词，其中第一个名词用作定语修饰后一个名词，这样的例子有很多，又如: alarm clock, telephone number等。‎ 知识拓展 复合名词变复数的规则，你一定要牢记啊！‎ ‎◎通常只把主体名词变为复数 school boy—school boys(男生) apple tree—apple trees(苹果树) ‎ vegetable sandwich—vegetable sandwiches(蔬菜三明治) ‎ girl friend—girl friends（女朋友）‎ ‎◎如果没有主体名词，在最后一个名词上用复数。‎ good-for-nothing—good-for-nothings（饭桶、无用的人）‎ three-year-old—three-year-olds（三岁的孩子）‎ ‎◎由man, woman和另外一个名词构成的复合名词，两个部分都要用复数。‎ man teacher—men teachers(男教师)‎ gentleman farmer—gentlemen farmers （乡绅）‎ ‎(2)by mistake 表示“错误地（因粗心、遗忘等所致）”。‎ Sorry, I took your bag by mistake. 对不起，我错拿了你的手提包。‎ 短语链语 mistake ... for “错把……当作……”‎ ‎5. George Crum cooked them for a long time until they were ‎ crispy. (P71)George Crum将它们做了很长时间，直到它们变脆了。‎ until常用作介词或连词，用来引导介词短语或从句在句子中作时间状语。‎ ‎◎在肯定句中，until与延续性、持续性动词连用，表示“直到……为止”。‎ I worked until late in the afternoon. 我一直干到下午很晚的时候。‎ ‎◎在否定句中，until常与瞬间动词、短暂性动词连用，表示“直到……才……”，“不到……不……”。‎ The rain didn’t stop until midnight. 雨直到半夜才停。‎ I won’t leave until you promise to help me. 你不答应帮助我，我不会离开。‎ ‎6. And he sprinkled lots of salt on them so they were salty. (P71) 然后，他在上面撒很多盐，这样它们就咸了。‎ ‎(1)sprinkle 是“撒、洒”的意思，常构成sprinkle A on/over B 或sprinkle B with A表示“撒(某物)于(某物的表面)”。‎ She sprinkled sand along the icy path. 她往结冰的路上撒了些沙子。‎ He sprinkled vinegar on his fish and chips. 他往鱼和土豆上洒了些醋。‎ ‎(2)salt是不可数名词，其形容词是salty。在英语中，很多名词后加-y可以构成形容词，表示“充满/包含……”，其意思与原来词汇的意思相同，只是词性不同，如cloud—cloudy, hair—hairy,‎ ‎ rose—rosy, sleep—sleepy等。‎ ‎7. Some leaves from a nearby bush fell into the water and remained there for some time. (P72)附近丛林里的一些树叶掉进了水里，并留在那里很长时间。‎ ‎(1) fall into在这里是“落入、陷入”的意思。 ‎ Some ash fell into my cup. 一些灰掉进我的杯子里了。‎ A ripe fruit happened to fall into his hand. 一个熟了的果子碰巧掉在他手里。‎ ‎(2)fall into有时也可以作“开始”解。‎ He fell into conversation with me. 他开始和我谈起话来。‎ ‎(3)remain 表示“继续、依然、停留”，后面接名词，动词不定式。‎ He remained a prisoner for the rest of his life. 他的余生都在牢中度过。‎ It sounds a good idea, but it remains to be seen whether it will succeed.听起来这是个好注意，可是它能否成功，要等以后才能知晓。‎ ‎(4)remain后面也可以接副词或介词短语。‎ She remains in the house all these days. 她这些天一直呆在那栋房子里。‎ Three out of four of them remained single. 他们四个人中有三个人还是单身。‎ 特别提示 remain还有“剩下、残余”的意思。‎ I can’t go to the cinema because I have a lot of homework remained undone.‎ 我不能去看电影，因为我还有很多作业未做。‎ ‎8. And in this way, one of the world’s favorite drinks was invented. (P72)就这样，世界上最受欢迎的一种饮料产生了。‎ 本句中的in the way意为“就这样”，“以这种方式”。‎ The song was composed in this way. 这首歌就这样被创作出来了。‎ In this way, you will find the answer to this question. ‎ 用这种方法，你可以找到这个问题的答案。‎ 知识拓展 way主要有以下几种用法：‎ ‎◎表示“方法”，接不定式，...way to do sth这一结构等于...way of doing sth。‎ Scientists are trying to find ways to prevent(of preventing) disease.‎ 科学家们正在寻找预防疾病的方法。‎ There are many ways of traveling(to travel), for example, by air.‎ 旅行有许多方式，例如乘飞机。‎ ‎◎表示“路途”，“路线”，常构成on one’s/the way to...“在……的途中”。在这一结构中，介词to表示方向，后接名词。如果后面接地点副词如here, there, home时则不用to。‎ I’m on my way home.我正在回家的路上。‎ She’s on her way to see the film.她正在去看电影的路上。‎ ‎◎表示“方向”。‎ Look this way.看这边。‎ Go that way.往那边走。‎ ‎◎表示“距离”，“路程”。 ‎ Beijing is a long way from here.北京离这里很远。‎ ‎9. Dr Naismith divided the men in his class into two teams, and taught them how to play his new game. (P74)奈斯密斯医生把他的学生分成两组，并教他们如何玩他的新游戏。‎ 本句中的divide...into是动介短语，与separate...into同义，意为“把……划分成”，其中divide是及物动词。 ‎ My father divided the cake into four pieces. 我爸爸把蛋糕分成4块。‎ We divided ourselves into small groups to carry out the plan.‎ 我们分成几个小组来执行这个计划。‎ ‎10. It is believed that on December 21st, 1891, the first basketball game in history was played. (P74)人们认为1891年12月21日是历史上的第一次篮球比赛的日子。‎ ‎(1)本句中的It is believed that... 相当于people believe that...是“人们相信/认为”的意思，that引导的是主语从句。‎ It is believed that by the year 2010, the population of the world ‎ will be seven billion.‎ ‎=People believe that by the year 2010, the population of the world will be seven billion.人们都认为到2010年，世界人口将达到七十亿。‎ ‎(2)believe意为“相信”，“认为”，一般表示相信某人是诚实的或某事是真实的，后面可以接名词、代词、从句或复合结构作宾语。‎ I just could not believe my eyes. 我简直不敢相信我的眼睛。‎ Scientists believe that whales can live for twenty to thirty years.‎ 科学家们认为鲸可以活二十到三十年。‎ ‎◎believe可以用于被动语态。‎ They are believed to have discussed this problem.据说，这个他们已经讨论过了。‎ 特别提示 believe与believe in的含义不同。‎ ‎◎believe in意为“信奉、信仰”，后面常接表示真理或宗教一类的名词，也可作“信任、信赖”解。‎ My grandpa believes in Buddhism. 我爷爷信奉佛教。‎ I can’t believe in his honesty. 我不相信他诚实。人教版新目 Unit 1‎ 一、知识点 ‎1.Check in : 在旅馆的登记入住。 Check out: 在旅馆结账离开。‎ ‎2.By: ①通过…..方式（途径）。例：I learn English by listening to tapes.‎ ‎②在…..旁边。例：by the window/the door ‎ ‎③乘坐交通工具 例：by bus/car ‎ ‎④在……之前，到……为止。例：by October在10月前 ‎ ‎⑤被 例：English is spoken by many people.‎ ‎3.how与what的区别：‎ ‎ how通常对方式或程度提问，意思有：怎么样 如何，通常用来做状语、表语。‎ ‎ what通常对动作的发出者或接受者提问，意思为 什么，通常做宾语，主语。‎ ‎①How is your summer holiday? It’s OK.(how表示程度 做表语)‎ ‎②How did you travel around the world? I travel by air.‎ ‎③What do you learn at school? I learn English, math and many other subjects.‎ ① What…think of…? How…like…?‎ ② What…do with…? How…deal with…?‎ ③ What…like about…? How…like…?‎ ④ What’s the weather like today? How’s the weather today?‎ ⑤ What to do? How to do it?‎ e.g. What do you think of this book?=How do you like this book?‎ ‎ I don’t know what I should do with the matter.=I don’t know how I should deal with it.‎ ‎ What do you like about China?=How do you like China?‎ ‎ I don’t know what to do next step?=I don’t know how to do it next step?‎ ㊣ What good / bad weather it is today!（weather为不可数名词，其前不能加 a ）‎ ㊣ What a fine / bad day it is today! （day为可数名词，其前要加 a ） ‎ ‎4. aloud, loud与loudly的用法 : 三个词都与"大声"或"响亮"有关。‎ ‎ ①aloud是副词,重点在出声能让人听见,但声音不一定很大,‎ 常用在读书或说话上。通常放在动词之后。aloud没有比较级形式。‎ 如: He read the story aloud to his son.他朗读那篇故事给他儿子听。‎ ‎②loud可作形容词或副词。用作副词时,常与speak, talk, laugh等动词连用,多用于比较级,须放在动词之后。如: ‎ She told us to speak a little louder. 她让我们说大声一点。‎ ‎③loudly是副词,与loud同义,有时两者可替换使用,但往往 含有令人讨厌或打扰别人的意思,可位于动词之前或之后。如: ‎ He does not talk loudly or laugh loudly in public. 他不当众大声谈笑。‎ ‎5. voice 指人的嗓音 也指鸟鸣。‎ ‎ sound 指人可以听到的各种声音。‎ ‎ noise 指噪音、吵闹声 ‎6. find + 宾语 + 宾补（名词 形容词 介词短语 分词等）‎ ‎ 例：I find him friendly. I found him working in the garden.‎ We found him in bed. He found the window closed.‎ We found her honest.‎ ‎7. 常见的系动词有： ‎ ‎①是：am 、is、 are ‎ ‎②保持：keep、 stay ‎ ‎③ 转变：become、 get、 turn ‎ ‎④ ……起来 feel、 look、 smell、 taste、 sound ‎8. get + 宾语+宾补（形容词 过去分词 动词不定式） 使某种情况发生 例：Get the shoes clean. 把鞋擦干净 ‎ Get Mr. Green to come. 让格林先生进来 I want to get my bike repaired. 我想去修自行车 You can’t get him waiting. 你不能让他老等着 ‎9. 动词不定式做定语 ‎①与所修饰的名词构成主谓关系 The next train to arrive was from New York. He is always the first to come.‎ ‎②与所修饰的名词构成动宾关系 I have nothing to say. I need a pen to write with.‎ I need some paper to write on. I don’t have a room to live in.‎ ‎10. practice , fun 做名词为不可数名词 ‎ ‎11. add 补充说 又说 ‎12. join 加入某团体 并成为其中一员 attend 出席参加会议或讲座 ‎ join in与take part in指参加到某项活动中去。‎ ‎13.all、 both、 always以及every复合词与not连用构成部分否定。其完全否定为：all---none, both---neither, everything---nothing, everybody---nobody.‎ ‎14. be afraid of doing sth. / sth.害怕 be afraid of being alone be afraid to do sth.害怕 ‎ be afraid that恐怕担心，表示委婉语气 ‎15.either：①放在否定句末表示“也” ‎ ‎②两者中的“任一”‎ ‎③either…or…或者…或者.…引导主语部分，谓语动词按照就近原则 ‎16.complete完成，是个较正式的词，后不能接动名词 ‎ finish指日常事物的完成 ‎17.a,an 与序数词连用表示“又一”，“再一”。‎ ‎ 例：Please give me a second apple. There comes a fifth girl.‎ ‎18.have trouble/difficult/problem (in) doing….. 干…..遇到麻烦，困难 ‎19.unless 除非，如果不，等于“if not”本身就表示否定，引导条件状语从句，主句为将来时，条件状语从句用一般现在时表示将来。‎ ‎ 例：My baby sister doesn’t cry unless she’s hungry.‎ ‎ =My baby sister doesn’t cry if she isn’t hungry.‎ Unless you take more care, you’ll have an accident. ‎ 如果你不多加小心的话，你会出事的。‎ ‎20.instead: adv. 代替，更换。 ‎ ‎ 例：We have no coffee, would you like tea instead？ ‎ 我们没有咖啡了，改喝茶好吗？‎ It will take days by car, so let’s fly instead. ‎ 开车去要好几天呢，咱们还是坐飞机吧。‎ Tom was ill, so I went instead.汤姆病了，所以换了我去。‎ instead of doing sth. 作为某人或某事物的替换 例：Let’s play cards instead of watching TV. ‎ We sometimes eat rice instead of potatoes.‎ Give me the red one instead of the green one.‎ ‎21.spoken 口头的，口语的。spoken English 口头英语 ‎ speaking 讲话的，说某种语言的。Speaking skills讲英语的能力 ‎22. 提建议的句子：‎ ‎①What/ how about +doing sth.? 如：What/ How about going shopping? ‎ ‎ ②Why don’t you + do sth.? 如：Why don’t you go shopping?‎ ‎ ③Why not + do sth. ? 如：Why not go shopping? ‎ ‎ ④Let’s + do sth. 如： Let’s go shopping ‎ ⑤Shall we/ I + do sth.? 如：Shall we/ I go shopping?‎ ‎23. a lot 许多 常用于句末 如：I eat a lot. 我吃了许多。‎ ‎24. too…to 太…而不能 常用的句型 too+adj./adv. + to do sth. ‎ 如：I’m too tired to say anything. 我太累了，什么都不想说。‎ ‎25. not …at all 一点也不 根本不 如：‎ I like milk very much. I don’t like coffee at all. ‎ 我非常喜欢牛奶。我一点也不喜欢咖啡。‎ ‎ not经常可以和助动词结合在一起，at all 则放在句尾 ‎26.be / get excited about sth.=== be / get excited about doing sth. ‎ ‎=== be excited to do sth. 对…感兴奋 如：‎ ‎ I am / get excited about going to Beijing.===‎ ‎ I am excited to go to Beijing. 我对去北京感到兴奋。‎ ‎27. ① end up doing sth 终止做某事，结束做某事 如：‎ ‎ The party ended up singing. 晚会以唱歌而结束。‎ ‎ ② end up with sth. 以…结束 如：‎ ‎ The party ended up with her singing. 晚会以她的歌唱而告终。‎ ‎28. first of all 首先 ‎. to begin with 一开始 ‎ later on 后来、随 ‎29. also 也、而且（用于肯定句）常在句子的中间 ‎ either 也（用于否定句）常在句末 ‎ too 也 (用于肯定句) 常在句末=as well ‎ ‎30. make mistakes 犯错 ‎ ‎ mistake sb. for …把……错认为……‎ ‎ make mistakes (in) doing sth. 在干某事方面出错 ‎ by mistake 错误地；由于搞错 ‎ mistake---mistook----mistaken 如：I often make mistakes. 我经常犯错。‎ ‎ I mistook him for his brother.我错把他认成了他的哥哥。‎ make a mistake 犯一个错误 如： I have made a mistake. ‎ 我已经犯了一个错误。‎ ‎31. laugh at sb. 笑话；取笑（某人） ‎ 如：Don’t laugh at me!不要取笑我!‎ ‎32. take notes 做笔记，做记录 ‎ ‎33. enjoy doing sth . 喜欢做…乐意做… 如：‎ ‎ She enjoys playing football. 她喜欢踢足球。‎ ‎ enjoy oneself 过得愉快 如：He enjoyed himself. 他过得愉快。‎ ‎34. native speaker 说本族语的人 ‎35. one of +(the+ 形容词比较级)+名词复数形式 …其中之一 如： She is one of the most popular teachers. 她是最受欢迎的教师之一。‎ ‎36. It’s +形容词+(for sb. ) to do sth. (对于某人来说)做某事…‎ ‎ 如：It’s difficult (for me ) to study English.对于我来说学习英语太难了。‎ ‎ 句中的it 是形式主语，真正的主语是to study English ‎37. practice doing 练习做某事 如：‎ ‎ She often practice speaking English. 她经常练习说英语。‎ ‎38. decide to do sth. 决定做某事 如：‎ ‎ LiLei has decided to go to BeiJing . 李雷已经决定去北京。‎ ‎39. deal with 处理 如：I dealt with a lot of problem.‎ ‎40. worry about sb./ sth. 担心某人/ 某事 ‎ ‎ 如：Mother worried about his son just now. 妈妈刚才担心他的儿子。‎ ‎41. be angry with sb. 对某人生气 如：‎ ‎ I was angry with her. 我对她生气。‎ ‎42. perhaps === maybe 也许 ‎43. go by (时间) 过去 如： Two years went by. 两年过去了。‎ ‎44. see sb. / sth. doing 看见某人正在做某事 强调正在发生 see sb. / sth. do 看见某人在做某事 如：‎ ‎ 如： She saw him drawing a picture in the classroom.她看见他正在教室里画画。‎ ‎45. each other 彼此 ‎ ‎46. regard… as … 把…看作为…. 如：‎ ‎　The boys regarded Anna as a fool. 这些男孩把安娜看成傻瓜。‎ ‎47. too many　许多　修饰可数名词　如：too many girls ‎ too much　许多　修饰不可数名词 如：too much milk ‎ ‎ much too　太　　修饰形容词 如：much too beautiful ‎48. change…　into…　将…变为…　‎ 如：The magician changed the pen into a book. 这个魔术师将这本书变为一本书。‎ ‎49. with the help of sb. == with one’s help 在某人的帮助下 ‎ 如：with the help of LiLei == with LiLei’s help 在李雷的帮助下 ‎50. compare … to …　把…与…相比　‎ 如：Compare you to Anna, you are lucky.你和安娜相比，你是幸运的。‎ 二、短语：‎ ‎1.by making flashcards 通过做单词抽认卡 ‎ ‎2. ask…for help 向某人求助 ‎3.read aloud 朗读 ‎ ‎4.that way (=in that way) 通过那种方式 ‎5.improve my speaking skills 提高我的会话技巧 ‎ ‎6.for example (=for instance)例如 ‎7.have fun 玩得高兴 ‎ ‎8.have conversations with friends 与朋友对话 ‎9.get excited 高兴，激动 ‎ ‎10.end up speaking in Chinese 以说汉语结束对话 ‎11.do a survey about… 做有关…的调查 ‎ ‎12.keep an English notebook 记英语笔记 ‎13.spoken English (= oral English) 英语口语 ‎ ‎14.make mistakes 犯错误 ‎15.get the pronunciation right 使发音准确 ‎ ‎16.practise speaking English 练习说英语 ‎ ‎17.first of all 首先 ‎ ‎18.begin with 以…开始 ‎19.later on随后 ‎ ‎20.in class在课堂上 ‎21.laught at 嘲笑 ‎ ‎22.take notes 记笔记 ‎23.enjoy doing 喜欢干… ‎ ‎24.write down 写下，记下 ‎25.look up (v + adv) 查找，查询 ‎ ‎26.native speakers 说本族话的人 ‎27.make up 编造，虚构，化妆，打扮 ‎ ‎28.around the world 全世界 ‎29.deal with 对待，处理，解决 ‎ ‎30.worry about (be worried about) 担心，担忧 ‎31.be angry with 生某人的气 ‎ ‎32.stay angry 生气 ‎33.go by 消逝 ‎ ‎34. regard…as… 把…当做…‎ ‎35.complain about/of 抱怨 ‎ ‎36. change…into… 把…变成… （= turn into）‎ ‎37.with the help of 在…的帮助下 ‎ ‎38. compare…to (with)… 把…和…作比较 ‎39.think of (think about) 想起，想到 ‎ ‎40.physical problems身体上的问题 ‎41.break off 中断，突然终止 ‎ ‎42. not…at all 根本不，全然不 三、句子 ‎1.How do you study for a test? 你怎样为考试做准备？‎ ‎2.I have learned a lot that way. 用那种方法，我已经学到了很多东西。‎ ‎3.It’s too hard to understand the voice. 听懂那些声音太难了。‎ ‎4.Memorizing the words of pop songs also helped a little.‎ 记流行歌曲的词也起作用。‎ ‎5. Wei Ming feels differently. 卫明有不同的感受。‎ ‎6.He finds watching movies frustrating. 他觉得看电影让人感到沮丧.‎ ‎7.She added that having conversations with friends was not helpful at all. ‎ 她又说和朋友对话根本没用。‎ ‎8.I don’t have a partner to practice English with. ‎ 我没有搭档一起练习英语。‎ ‎9.Later on, I realized that it doesn’t matter if you don’t understand every word.随后，我认识到听不懂每个词并没有关系。‎ ‎10.It’s amazing how much this helped. 我惊异于这些方法竟如此有用。‎ ‎11.My teacher is very impressed. 给老师留下了深刻的印象。‎ ‎12.She had trouble making complete sentences. 她很难造出完整的句子。‎ ‎13.What do you think you are doing? 你在做什么？‎ ‎14.Most people speak English as a second language. ‎ 英语对于大多数人来说是第二语言。‎ ‎15.How do we deal with our problem? 我们怎样处理我们的问题？‎ ‎16.It is our duty to try our best to deal with each challenge in our education with the help of our teachers. 在老师的帮助下尽我们最大的努力来应对挑战是我们的责任。‎ He can’t walk or even speak.他无法走路，甚至无法说话 Unit 2‎ 一、知识点 ‎1. used to 过去常常做某事,暗指现在已经不存在的动作或状态. 后跟动词原形. used to do sth.‎ ‎ There used to be ….（反意疑问句）didn’t there?‎ 否定形式为: didn’t use to 或 usedn’t to 疑问形式为: Did…use to…? 或 Used…to…?‎ be/get used to doing sth.习惯于, to 为介词.‎ ‎2. wear 表示状态. =be in +颜色的词 ‎ put on 表示动作. ‎ dress + 人 给某人穿衣服.dress sb. / oneself have on表示状态（不用于进行时态）‎ ‎3. on the swim team on 是…的成员,在…供职.‎ ‎4. Don’t you remember me? 否定疑问句.（考点）‎ ‎ Yes, I do. 不, 我记得. No, I don’t 是的, 我不记得了.‎ ‎5. 反意疑问句: ‎ ‎① 陈述部分的主语为 this, that, 疑问部分主语用it; 陈述部分主语用 these, those, 疑问部分用they 做主语.‎ 例: This is a new story, isn’t it?‎ ‎ Those are your parents, aren’t they?‎ ‎② 陈述部分是 there be 结构, 疑问部分仍用 there 例: There was a man named Paul, wasn’t there?‎ ‎③ I am 后的疑问句, 用aren’t I ‎ 例: I am in Class 2, aren’t I?‎ ‎④ 陈述部分与含有 not, no, never, few, little, hardly, seldom, neither, none 等词时,疑问部分用肯定.‎ 例: Few people liked this movie, didn’t they?‎ 但陈述句中若带有否定前缀或后缀的单词时, 这个句子仍视为肯定, 后面仍用否定.‎ 例: Your sister is unhappy, isn’t she?‎ ‎⑤ 陈述部分的主语若为不定式或 V-ing 短语, 疑问部分主语用it.‎ 例: To spend so much money on clothes is unnecessary, isn’t it?‎ ‎⑥ 陈述句中主语是 nobody, no one, everyone, everybody 等指人的不定代词时,疑问部分用they做主语; 若陈述部分主语是 something, anything, noting, everything 等指事物的不定代词时, 疑问部分用it 做主语.‎ 例: Nobody says one word about the accident, do they?‎ ‎ Everything seems perfect, doesn’t it?‎ ‎⑦ 当主语是第一人称I时, 若谓动为think, believe, guess 等词时, 且其后跟宾丛,这时疑问句部分的人称, 时态要与宾语从句保持一致, 同时还要考虑否定转移.‎ 例: I don’t think he can finish the work in time, can he?‎ ‎⑧ 前面是祈使句, 后用 will you? (let’s 开头时, 后用shall we?)‎ ‎6. be terrified of 害怕的程度比 be afraid of 深.‎ ‎7. miss: ① 思念, 想念 例: I really miss the old days.‎ ‎ ② 错过, 未中, 未赶上, 未找到. ‎ 例: It’s a pity that you miss the bus.‎ ‎ The boy shot at the goal, but missed.‎ ‎8. no more (用在句中)=not…any more (用在句尾) 指次数;‎ ‎ no longer (用在句中)=not…any longer (用在句尾) 指时间.‎ ‎9. right: ① adj. 正确的, 右边的② n. 右方, 权利③ adv. 直接地.‎ ‎10. It seems that Yu Mei has changed a lot. = Yu Mei seems to have changed a lot.‎ ‎11. afford + n. /pron. afford + to do 常与can, be able to 连用.‎ 例: Can you afford a new car?‎ ‎ The film couldn’t afford to pay such large salaries.‎ ‎12. as well as 连词, 不但…而且… 强调前者. (若引导主语, 谓动与前者在人称和数上一致 例: Living things need air and light as well as water. ‎ 生命不仅需要水, 还需要空气和阳光.‎ ‎ I as well as they am ready to help you. ‎ 不仅是他们, 我也愿意帮助你.‎ ‎13. alone = by oneself 独自一人. lonely 孤独的, 寂寞的.‎ ‎14. in the last/past + 一段时间 ‎ during the last/past + 一段时间 与现在完成时连用.‎ ‎15. die (v.) dead (adj.) death (n.) dying (垂死的)‎ ‎16. play the piano　弹钢琴 ‎17. ①be/ become interested in sth. 对…感兴趣 ‎②be interested in doing sth. 对做…感兴趣 ‎③show great interest in 在……方面产生极大的兴趣 ‎④a place of interest 一处名胜 some places of interest ‎ ‎ 如：He is interested in math, but he isn’t interested in speaking ‎ 　　 English. 他对数学感兴趣，但是他对说英语不感兴趣。‎ ‎⑤ interested adj. 感兴趣的，指人对某事物感兴趣，往往主语是人 ‎ ⑥ interesting adj.有趣的，指某事物/某人具有趣味，主语往往是物 ‎ ⑦ an interesting book / man ‎ ‎18. 害怕… be terrified of sth. 如：I am terrified of the dog.‎ ‎ be terrified of doing sth. 如：I am terrified of speaking.‎ ‎19. on 副词，表示（电灯、电视、机械等）在运转中/打开，‎ 其反义词off. 　with the light on 灯开着 ‎20. walk to somewhere 步行到某处 walk to school 步行到学校 ‎21.spend 动词，表示“花费金钱、时间”‎ ‎ ①spend…on sth. 在某事上花费（金钱、时间）‎ ‎ ②spend…doing sth. 花费（金钱、时间）去做某事　如：‎ He spends too much time on clothes. 他花费太多的时间在衣着 He spend 3 months building the bridge.他花费了三个月去建这座桥。‎ ‎ pay for 花费 如：I pay 10 yuan for the book. 我花了10元买这本书。‎ ‎ take动词 有“花费”的意思　常用的结构有：‎ ‎　　It take(s) sb. … to do sth. 如：It takes me a day to read the book.‎ ‎22. chat with sb. 与某人闲聊　如：I like to chat with him. ‎ ‎ 我喜欢和他聊天。‎ ‎23. worry about sb./ sth. 担心某人/某事　worry 是动词 ‎　 be worried about sb./sth. 担心某人/某事　worried 是形容词　‎ 如：Don’t worry about him. 不用担心他。‎ ‎　　 Mother is worried about her son. 妈妈担心他的儿子。‎ ‎24. all the time 一直、始终 ‎25. take sb. to + 地方　送/带某人去某个地方　如：‎ ‎　　A person took him to the hospital. 一个人把他送到了医院。‎ ‎ Lui took me home. 刘把我送回了家。(home 的前面不能用to)‎ ‎26. hardly adv. 几乎不、没有 hard 困难的；猛烈地 ‎ hardly ever 很少　‎ ‎ hardly 修饰动词时，通常放在助动词、情态动词之后，实义 动词之前　助动词/情态动词＋hardly ‎　　　 hardly + 实义动词　　如：‎ ‎　　I can hardly understand them. 我几乎不能够明白他们。‎ I hardly have time to do it. 我几乎没有时间去做了。‎ It rains hard outside, I could hardly go out.‎ ‎27. in the last few years. 在过去的几年内　常与完成时连用　如：‎ ‎ I have lived in China in the last few years. 在过去的几年内我在中国住。‎ ‎28. be different from 与…不同　‎ ‎29. how to swim 怎样游泳　‎ ‎　不定式与疑问词连用：动词不定式可以和what, which, how, where, when 等引导的疑问句连用，构成不定工短语。如：‎ ‎ The question is when to start. 问题是什么时候开始。‎ ‎ I don’t know where to go. 我不知道去哪。‎ ‎30. make sb./ sth. + 形容词　　make you happy ‎ make sb./ sth. + 动词原形 make him laugh ‎31. move to +地方　搬到某地　如：I moved to Beijing last year.‎ ‎32.It seems that +从句　看起来好像……　如：‎ ‎　It seems that he has changed a lot. 看起来他好像变了许多。‎ ‎33. help sb. with sth. 帮某人某事　 ‎ help sb. (to ) do sth. 帮某人做某事　‎ She helped me with English.　她帮助我学英语。‎ She helped me (to) study English。　她帮助我学习英语。‎ ‎34. fifteen-year-old 作形容词　15岁的　‎ ‎ fifteen-year-olds 作名词指15岁的人 ‎　 fifteen years old 指年龄　15岁　如：‎ a fifteen-year-old boy　一个15岁的男孩 Fifteen-year-olds like to sing. 15岁的人喜欢唱歌。‎ I am fifteen years old . 我是15岁。‎ ‎35.支付不起… 　can’t /couldn’t afford to do sth. ‎ ‎ 　　　　　　 can’t / couldn’t afford sth.‎ ‎ 如：I can’t/couldn’t afford to buy the car.‎ ‎ I can’t/couldn’t afford the car. 我买不起这个辆小车。‎ ‎36. as + 形容词./副词＋as sb. could/can 尽某人的…能力　如：‎ ‎ Zhou run as fast as her could/can. 她尽她最快的能力去跑。‎ ‎37. get into trouble with 遇到麻烦　‎ ‎38. in the end 最后 ‎39. make a decision 下决定　下决心　‎ ‎40. to one’s surprise 令某人惊讶　如：‎ to their surprise　令他们惊讶　to LiLei’s surprise令李雷惊讶 ‎41. take pride in sth. 以…而自豪　如：‎ ‎ His father always take pride in him. 他的爸爸总是以他而自豪 ‎42. pay attention to sth. 对…注意，留心　如：‎ ‎　　You must pay attention to your friend. 你应该多注意你的朋友。‎ ‎43. be able to do sth. 能做某事　如：‎ ‎　　　She is able to do it. 她能够做到。‎ ‎44. give up doing sth. 放弃做某事　如：‎ ‎　　　My father has given up smoking. 我爸爸已经放弃吸烟了。‎ 复合句与简单句的转化：‎ ① when ------ at the age of …‎ ② so…that…----- too… to…. / enough to …‎ ③ so that…------ in order to do sth.‎ ④ because…----- because of…‎ ⑤ if ….----- without / with…‎ ⑥ if…----- 祈使句+ and / or + 简单句 ⑦ 宾语从句----特殊疑问词+动词不定式 ⑧ be afraid ‎ be sure that +从句---- 动词不定式 ‎ be sorry ⑨ It seems / seemed that sb….------ sb. seems / seemed to do sth.‎ ⑩ Sb. hopes / hoped that ….-------sb. hopes / hoped to do sth.‎ 二、 短语 ‎1. be more interested in 对…更感兴趣.‎ ‎2. on the swim team 游泳队的队员.‎ ‎3. be terrified of 害怕.‎ ‎4. gym class 体操课.‎ ‎5. worry about. 担心.‎ ‎6. all the time 一直, 总是 ‎7. chat with 与…闲聊 ‎8. hardly ever 几乎从不 ‎ ‎9. walk to school = go to school on foot ‎ ‎ take the bus to school = go to school by bus ‎ ‎10. as well as 不仅…而且 ‎ ‎11. get into trouble 遇到麻烦 ‎12. make a decision 做出决定 ‎ ‎13. to one’s surprise 使某人吃惊的是 ‎14. take pride in 为…感到骄傲 ‎ ‎15. pay attention to 留心, 注意 ‎16. consist of 由…组成/构成. be made up of 由…组成/构成.‎ ‎17. instead of 代替, 而不是 ‎ ‎18. in the end 最后, 终于 ‎19. play the piano 弹钢琴 ‎ 三、句子 ‎1.I used to be afraid of the dark. 我以前害怕黑暗.‎ ‎2.I go to sleep with my bedroom light on. 我开着卧室的灯睡觉.‎ ‎3.I used to spend a lot of time playing games with my friends. 以前我常常花很多时间和我的朋友们玩游戏.‎ ‎4.I hardly ever have time for concerts. 我几乎没有时间去听音乐会.‎ ‎5.My life has changed a lot in the last few years.‎ ‎6.It will make you stressed out. 那会使你紧张的.‎ ‎7.It seems that Yu Mei has changed a lot. 玉梅似乎变化很大.‎ Unit 3‎ 一、知识点 ‎①英语有两种语态：主动语态和补动语态　‎ ‎　　主动语态表示是动作的执行者 ‎　　被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者　‎ ‎　 Cats 　eat 　fish. 　　　（主动语态）猫吃鱼。‎ ‎　 Fish is eaten by cats.　(被动语态)鱼被猫吃。‎ ‎ ②被动语态的构成 ‎　　由“助动词be ＋及物动词的过去分词”构成 ‎　　助动词be 有人称、数和时态的变化，其变化规则与be 作为连系动词时完全一样。‎ 时态 被动语态结构 例句 一般现在 时 am ‎ are +过去分词 is ‎ English is spoken in many countries.‎ 一般过去 时 was +过去分词 were + 过去分词 This bridge was built in 1989.‎ 情 态 动 词 can/should may +be+过去分词 must/……‎ The work must be done right now.‎ ‎ ③被动语态的用法 当我们不知道谁是动作的执行者，或者没有必要指出谁是动作的执行者，或者只需强调动作的承受者时，要用被动语态。‎ ‎2. allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事（主动语态）如：‎ ‎　 Mother allows me to watch TV every night. 妈妈允许我每晚看电视。‎ ‎　be allowed to do sth. 被允许做某事（被动语态）如：‎ ‎　　LiLy is allowed to go to Qinzhou. 莉莉被允许去钦州。‎ ‎3. get their ears pierced 穿耳洞 ‎　让/使（别人）做某事　 get sth. done(过去分词)‎ ‎　　　　　　　　　　　 have sth. done 如：‎ ‎　I get my car repaired. == I have my car repaired. 我让别人修好我的车 ‎ I want to have my hair cut. 我要理发.‎ ‎4. enough 足够　‎ ‎　形容词＋enough 如：beautiful enough　足够漂亮 ‎ enough＋名词　如：enough food 足够食物 ‎ enough to 　足够…去做…　如：‎ ‎　I have enough money to go to Beijing. 我有足够的钱去北京。‎ ‎ She is old enough to go to school.她够大去读书了。‎ ‎5. stop doing sth. 停止做某事　Please stop speaking.请停止说话。‎ stop to do sth. 停止下来去做某事　Please stop to speak. 请停下来说话。‎ ‎6. 看起来好像…sb. seem to do sth. = It seems that +从句 ‎ He seems to feel very sad.‎ ‎ It seems that he feels very sad. 他看起来好像很伤心。‎ ‎7.倒装句: ‎ 由so＋助动词(be/do/will/have)/情态动词＋主语　意为：…也是一样 Neither/Nor + be动词/助动词/情态动词+主语(前为否定) 表示与前面所述事实一致.‎ ‎　　She is a student. So am I.　她是一个学生，我也是。‎ ‎ She went to school just now. So did I . 她刚才去学校了，我也是 ‎ She has finished the work. So have I . 她已经完成了工作,我也完成了。‎ She will go to school. So will he.　她将去学校，他也是。‎ Tom can’t swim. Neither can John.‎ ‎8. yet 仍然，还　常用在否定句或疑问句当中 可与although/though连用 ‎9. stay up 熬夜如：I often stay up until 12:00pm.我经常熬夜到12点。‎ ‎10. clean up 打扫　整理　如：‎ ‎　　I have cleaned up the bedroom. 我已经打扫完了卧室。‎ ‎11. 程度副词：‎ always总是 usually经常 sometimes有时 never从不 ‎ 如：I am always/usually/sometimes/never late for school.‎ ‎ 我总是/经常/有时/从不上学迟到。‎ ‎12. 曾经做某事：　‎ ‎　　Do you ever get to school late? Yes, I do. No, I don’t.‎ ‎ Have you ever got to school late? Yes, I have. No, I haven’t.‎ ‎13. go shopping(去购物), go fishing(去钓鱼)‎ go swimming(去游泳), go boating(去划船)‎ go hiking(去登山), go trekking(去徒步)‎ ‎14. .be strict with+人. be strict in+事物.‎ 例: The head teacher is strict with his students ‎ ‎ He is strict in the work.‎ ‎15. take the test 参加考试 pass the test 通过考试 fail a test 考试失败 ‎16. the other day前几天,不久前的一天.(用于过去时)‎ every other day = every two days 每隔一天 （每两天）‎ ‎17. agree 同意　反义词 disagree不同意 动词 ‎ agreement 同意　反义词 disagreement 不同意　名词 ‎18. keep sb/ sth. ＋形容词　使某人/某物保持….　如：‎ We should keep our city clean.（cleaningⅹ）我们应该保持我们的城市干净。‎ Don’t keep me waiting for a long time.别让我等得太久。‎ ‎19. both…and…　+动词复数形式 如： Both Jim and Li Ming play bastketball.‎ ‎20. learn (sth.) from sb. 向谁学习(什么) 如：‎ ‎ Jim learnt English from his English teacher. 吉姆向他的英语老师学习英语 ‎21. have an opportunity to do sth. 有机会做某事 ‎ have a chance of doing sth. 有机会做某事 ‎ 如：I have an opportunity to go to Beijing. I have a chance of going to Beijing.‎ ‎22. at present 目前 ‎23. at least 最少 at most 最多 ‎24. 花费 take ,cost, spend , pay ‎ ‎ It take (sb.) time to do sth. It took (me) 10days to read the book.‎ ‎ sth. cost (sb.) …… The book cost (me) 100yuan.‎ ‎ sb. spend … on sth. She spent 10days on this book.‎ ‎ sb. spend …doing sth. She spent 10days reading this book.‎ sb. pay … for sth. She paid 10yuan for this book.‎ ‎25. have +时间段+off 放假，休息 如：have 2 days off off 不工作,不上班,不上学,不值班.‎ 例: I think I’ll take the afternoon off. 我想下午歇班.‎ ‎ She is off today. 她今天休息.‎ ‎ I have three days off next week. 下周我有三天假.‎ ‎ They haven’t had a day off since last week. 从上周来,他们没休息过一天.‎ ‎26. reply to 答复某人 如：She replayed to MrGreen.‎ ‎27. agree with sth. 同意某事 如：I agree with that idea.‎ ‎ agree to sb. 同意某人的意见 如：I agree to LiLei.‎ ‎28. get in the way of 碍事，妨碍 如： ‎ Her social life got in the way of her studies. 她的社会生活妨碍了她的学习。‎ ‎29. success n. succeed v. successful adj. successfully adv. ‎ ‎30. think about 与think of 的区别 ‎ ‎ ①当两者译为： 认为、想起、记着时，两者可互用 ‎ I often think about/ of that day. 我经常想起那天。‎ ‎ ②think about 还有“考虑”之意 ，think of 想到、想出时两者不能互用 ‎ At last, he thought of a good idea. 最后他想出了一个好主意。‎ ‎ We are thinking about going Qinzhou. 我们正在考虑去钦州。‎ ‎31. 对… 热衷， 对…兴趣 be serious about doing 如：She is serious about dancing. 她对跳舞热衷。‎ be serious about sth. 如：She is serious about him. 她对他感兴趣。‎ ‎32. practice doing 练习做某事 She often practice speaking English.‎ ‎33. care about sb. 关心某人 如：Mother often care about her son. ‎ ‎34. also 也 用于句中 ‎ either也 用于否定句且用于句末 ‎ too=as well 也 用于肯定句且用于句末 ‎ ‎ I am also a student. 我也是一个学生 ‎ I am a student too. 我也是一个学生。‎ I am not a student either. 我也不是一个学生。‎ ‎35.allow sb to do sth 允许某人做… allow doing sth 允许做…‎ ‎36.stupid silly foolish 三个词都有“蠢”的意思.但略有不同.stupid 程度最强,指智力 理解力 学习能力差. silly 指头脑简单,傻头傻脑,使人觉得可笑,带有感情色彩. foolish 尤其在口语中广泛使用.‎ 例: He is stupid in learning math. 他学习数学很笨.‎ ‎ Stop asking such silly questions. 别再问这样傻的问题了.‎ ‎ You are foolish to throw away such a good chance. ‎ 你真蠢,丢掉这样一个好机会.‎ ‎37.He doesn’t seem to have many friends.‎ ‎=It seems that he doesn’t have many friends.‎ ‎=He seems not to have many friends.‎ ‎38.clean (v.) 打扫,清理 ‎ clean up 比较彻底地打扫,清理 clean out 打扫,清理地最彻底.‎ ‎39.concentrate on… 全神贯注做…‎ 例: He decided to concentrate on physics because he failed the exam.‎ ‎ This company concentrates on China market. ‎ 这家公司把重点放在中国市场上.‎ ‎40. more…than…①与其说…不如说…; 比…更…‎ 例: The man is more stupid than nervous.‎ 与其说那人紧张,倒不如说他愚蠢.‎ ‎②在这一结构中,more做adj. 修饰名词,表示“比…多”‎ 例:I have more books than you. 我的书比你的多.‎ ‎41.volunteer ① n. 自愿者. ② v. volunteer to do sth. 自愿做…‎ 例: We all volunteered to help in the old people’s home.‎ 我们都志愿到敬老院帮忙. ‎ ‎42. get in the way (of)... 妨碍...‎ 例: He never gets in others’ way. 他从不妨碍别人.‎ ‎ The bikes over there will get in the way of others. 自行车放在那里会妨碍别人的.‎ ‎43. success (n.) successful (adj.) succeed (v.)‎ ‎44. only 处于句首,并后跟状语时,全句需要倒装.‎ 例: Only then did he understand it. 只有到那时,他才明白.‎ Only in this way can we learn English well. 只有这样我们才能把英语学好.‎ Only when she came home, did he learn the news. 当她到家时,他才得知了这消息.‎ ‎45. care about 关心,在乎,在意.‎ ‎ 例: No one cares about others nowadays. 现在没人关心别人.‎ ‎ I don’t care about what he does. 我并不在意他干什么.‎ 二、短语 ‎1. be allowed to do sth 被允许干… ‎ allow sb to do sth 允许某人干…‎ ‎ allow doing sth 允许干…‎ ‎2. sixteen-year-olds = sixteen-year-old boys and girls 16岁的孩子 ‎3. part-time jobs 兼职工作 ‎ ‎4. a driver’s license 驾照 ‎5. on weekends 在周末 ‎ ‎6. at that age 在那个年龄段 ‎7. on school nights 在上学期间的每个晚上 ‎ ‎8. stay up 熬夜 ‎9. clean up (相当与及物动词) 清扫 ‎ ‎10. fail (in) a test 考试不及格 ‎11. take the test 参加考试 ‎ ‎12. the other day 前几天 ‎13. all my classmates 我所有的同学 ‎ ‎14. concentrate on 全神贯注于 ‎15. be good for 对…有益 ‎ ‎16. in groups 成群的,按组的 ‎17. get noisy 吵闹(系表结构) ‎ ‎18. learn from 向某人学习 ‎19. at present 目前,现在 ‎ ‎20. have an opportunity to do sth 有做…的机会 ‎ ‎21.English-English dictionary 英英词典 ‎22. at least 至少 ‎ ‎23.eight hours’ sleep a night 每晚8小时的睡眠 ‎24. an old people’s home 敬老院 ‎ ‎25. take time to do sth 花费时间干…‎ ‎26. primary schools 小学 ‎ ‎27. have…off 放假,休息 ‎28. reply to 回答,答复 ‎ ‎29. get in the way of 妨碍 ‎30. a professional athlete 职业运动员 ‎ ‎31. achieve one’s dreams 实现梦想 ‎32. think about 思考,考虑 ‎ ‎33. in the end 最后,终于 ‎34. be serious about 对…热忠/极感兴趣 ‎35. spend…on + n. spend …(in) + v-ing 在…上花费时间/金钱 ‎36. care about 关心,担心,在乎 ‎ ‎37. agree with 同意…‎ 三.句子 ‎1. I don’t think twelve-year-olds should be allowed to get their ears pierced. ‎ 我认为不应该允许12岁的孩子穿耳孔.‎ ‎2.They talk instead of doing homework. 他们聊天而不是做作业.‎ ‎3.He is allowed to stay up until 11:00 pm. 允许他们熬到晚上11点.‎ ‎4.We should be allowed to take time to do things like that more often.‎ 我们应该被允许更加经常的花些时间多做这类事情.‎ ‎5.What school rules do you think should be changed? ‎ 你认为学校的哪些制度应该改一改了?‎ ‎6.The two pairs of jeans both look good on me. ‎ 这两条牛仔裤穿在我身上都适合.‎ ‎7.The classroom is a real mess. 教室太脏了.‎ ‎8.Should I be allowed to make my own decisions?‎ ‎9.Only then will I have a chance of achieving my dream. ‎ 只有这样我才能实现我的梦想.‎ ‎10.They should be allowed to practice their hobbies as much as they want. ‎ 应该允许他们对业余爱好想练多长时间就练多长时间.‎ ‎11.We have nothing against running. 我们没有理由反对他跑步.‎ Unit 4‎ 一、知识点 ‎ ‎1. if 引导的非真实性条件状语从句 即 虚拟语气 ‎ 通过动词形式的变化来表示说话人对发生的动作或存在的状态 所持的态度或看法的动词形式称为语气，虚拟语气表示说话人所说的 话不是事实，而是一种祝愿，建议或是与事实相反的假设等。‎ ‎ If 引导的条件状语从句分为真实和非真实条件句，非真实条件 句应用虚拟语气。如果要表示与现在或将来事实相反时，其虚拟语气结构为：‎ 句 型 条件从句 主 句 谓语动词形式 动词过去式(be动词一律用were)‎ would+动词原形 ‎ 即：(从句)if +主语+动词过去式(be 动词用were), 一般过去时 ‎(主句) 主语+would+动词原形 过去将来时 ‎ 如：If I had time, I would go for a walk.‎ 如果我有时间，我就会去散步。(事实上我现在没有时间) ‎ ‎ If I were you, I would take an umbrella. ‎ 假如我是你的话，我会带上雨伞。(事实上我不是你)‎ I would say no if someone asked me to be in a movie. ‎ 假如有人请我当电影演员，我会表示拒绝。(事实上瑞没有人请我当电影演员)‎ ‎2. pretend to do sth. 假装做某事 I pretended to sleep just now. ‎ ‎ pretend to be doing sth. 假装正在干某事 ‎ The students pretended to be writing when the teacher came in.‎ ‎ pretend +从句 假装… I pretended that I fell asleep. ‎ ‎3. be late for 迟到 如：‎ ‎ I am late for work/ school/ class/ party.‎ ‎4. a few 与 a little 的区别，few 与 little 的区别 ‎ ⑴ a few 一些 修饰可数名词 ‎ ‎ a little 一些 修饰不可数名词 两者表肯定意义 ‎ 如：He has a few friends. 他有一些朋友。 ‎ ‎ There is a little sugar in the bottle. 在瓶子里有一些糖。‎ ‎ ⑵ few 少数的 修饰可数名词 ‎ ‎ little 少数的　修饰不可数名词 但两者表否定意义 ‎ 如：He has few friends. 他没有几个朋友。 ‎ ‎ There is little sugar in the bottle.在瓶子里没有多少糖。‎ ‎5. hundred, thousand , million, billion (十亿)词前面有数词或several ‎ 一词时要不能加s ，反之，则要加s 并与of 连用， 表示数量很 多 如：several hundred/ thousand/ million/ billion people ‎ 几百/千/百万/十亿人 hundreds of trees 上百棵树 ‎8. what if + 从句 如果…怎么办 ， 要是… 又怎么样 如：‎ ‎ What if she doesn’t come? 要是她不来怎么办？‎ ‎ What if LiLei knows? 如果李雷知道了怎么办？‎ ‎9. add sth. to sth. 添加…到… ‎ 如： I added some sugar to water. 我把糖添加到水里。‎ ‎10. 系动词与形容词连用 get nervous 变得紧张 ‎ feel shy 觉得害羞 look friendly 看起来友好 ‎11. too +形/副+to do sth. 太…而不能 如：‎ ‎ I’m too tired to stand. 我太累了而不能站。‎ ‎12. help with sth. 如：They help with this problem.‎ ‎ help sb. do. 如：They help you relax. 他们帮助你放松 ‎13. in public 在公共场所 如:‎ Don’t smoke in public. 请不要在公共场所吸烟。‎ ‎14. energetic adj. 活力的 如：She is a energetic girl. 她是一个活力的女孩。‎ ‎ energy n. 活力 如：She has lots of energies. 她有活力。‎ ‎15. ask sb. to do 叫…做某事 ‎ ask sb. not to do sth.叫…不要做某事 ‎ tell sb. to do 告诉…做某事 ‎ tell sb. not to do sth. 告诉…不要做某事 如：Teacher asked me to clean the classroom.‎ ‎ Teacher asked me not to clean the classroom.‎ ‎16. start doing == start to do. 开始做某事 如：‎ ‎ He started speaking/ to speak. 他开始说话。‎ ‎17. borrow sth. from sb. 从某人那里借来某物 如：‎ ‎ I borrowed a book from Lily. 我从莉莉那里借来一本书。‎ ‎18.wait for sb.等某人 如：I am wait for him. 我正在等他。‎ ‎19. introduce sb. to sb. 把某人介绍给某人 如：‎ ‎ I introduced Lily to Anna. 我把莉莉介绍给安娜。‎ ‎20. invite sb. to do 邀请某人做某事 如：‎ ‎ Lily invited me to go to her home for supper. 莉莉邀请我去她家吃晚饭。‎ ‎21. have dinner/ supper 吃晚饭 have lunch/ breakfast 吃午餐、吃早餐 ‎22. plenty of 修饰不可数名词，也可以修饰可数名词 许多 如：‎ ‎ They have plenty of food/ apples. 他们有许多的食物/苹果。‎ ‎23. 给某人某物 give sth. to sb. 如： give an apple to me ‎ ‎ give sb. sth. give me an apple 给我一个苹果 ‎24. get along (with)=get on (with)‎ ‎ ①进行，进展 The business is getting along very well. 生意进展的很顺利。‎ ‎ How are you getting along with your English study? ‎ 你的英语学习进展的怎么样了？‎ ‎②相处 ‎ Do you get along with your boss?= Do you and your boss get along? ‎ 你跟老板合得来吗？‎ I’m getting along very well with my classmates. 我和同学们相处得很好。‎ ‎25. would rather … than … （= would … rather than）宁愿，而不愿。‎ 前后连接两个动词原形，否定形式为：would rather not do sth ‎①would rather … than … = prefer … to …‎ 但prefer … to … 若连接两个动词，动词应为v-ing 形式。‎ He would rather jog than play football.‎ ‎=He prefers jogging to playing football. ‎ ‎②would rather 常单独使用，表示“宁愿做…”‎ He would rather watch TV at home.‎ ‎③rather than = instead of 而不是（连接两个并列成分，前后对称）。‎ I’d prefer to go to in summer rather than in winter.‎ ‎ I decided to write rather than telephone.‎ ‎ I like going out with you rather than with him.‎ ‎ She enjoys listening rather than speaking.‎ ‎25. in fact 事实上 ‎26. let sb. down 让某人失望 如：‎ ‎ Don’t let your mother down. 不要让你的妈妈失望。‎ ‎27. come up with sth. 提出 想出 ‎ 如：He came up with a good idea. 他提出了一个好主意。 ‎ ‎ catch up with sb. 追上 赶上 ‎ 如：Lily caught up with Anna. 莉莉赶上了安娜。‎ ‎28. have experience doing 在做某事有经验 如：‎ ‎ I have experience teaching Chinese. 我在教英语方面有经验。‎ ‎29. come out 出版，出来 ‎ 如：The magazine comes out once a week. 这种杂志每周出一次。‎ ‎30. by accident 偶然地，无意之中 如：‎ Last week I cut my finger by accident. 上个星期我不小心割到自己的手指。‎ ‎31. hurry to do 匆忙… I hurry to call the police. ‎ ‎32. more than=over 超过 ‎34. offer 提供 offer sb sth 给××…… ‎ offer to sb sth 主动提出干……‎ ‎35. ①give sb sth=give sth to sb 类似的词还有:pass、lend、show、write、send等 ‎②buy sb sth=buy sth for sb 类似的词还有:make、draw、cook等 ‎36.look for寻找find找到、发现 find out指经过观察、探索、调查等弄清楚、弄明白。‎ discover 指发现那些客观存在而不为人所知的实情。如科学上的重大发现。‎ ‎37.bring 带来 take 带走 fetch 去并拿来 ‎38.talk to/with sb 同××说话。‎ tell 告诉, 分辨，辨别。‎ speak to sb 同××说话，做及物动词，后跟语言。‎ say 后跟名词、代词及宾语从句做宾语，着重强调说话内容。‎ ‎39.What if …… 如果……将会怎么样？（引导条件状语从句、疑问句）‎ What if she doesn’t come? 她要是不来怎么办？‎ ‎ What if your parent don’t agree? 如果你的父母不同意怎么办？‎ What if you should fall sick? 如果你生病了怎么办？‎ ‎40.What does/do ×× look like? 问相貌。‎ What’s ×× like? 问“品质性格”。‎ ‎41.give a speech 做演讲 have a speech听演讲 give a report 做报告 have a report 听报告 ‎42.permission (n.) 允许，许可 permit (v.) 允许 ‎ without permission 未经许可 ‎43.plenty of 充足的，相当多的。修饰可数或不可数名词，只能用于肯定句。否定、疑问句中用 enough.‎ ‎44.not……in the slightest=not……at all 根本不 ‎45.a little = a bit 修饰形容词、副词 a little = a bit of 修饰不可数名词 ‎46.the rest 其余的，可指代可数或不可数名词。The other(s) 只能指代可数名词 宾语从句 ：宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语。‎ ‎ 由连接词+ 主语+ 谓语　构成 ‎ 　常由下面的一些词引导：‎ ‎ ㈠由that 引导 表示陈述意义 that 可省略 ‎ He says (that) he is at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎ ㈡由if , whether 引导 表示 一般疑问意义(带有是否、已否、对否等)‎ ‎ I don’t know if / whether Wei Hua likes fish. 我不知道韦华是否喜欢鱼。‎ ‎ ㈢由 连接代词、连接副词(疑问词) 引导 表示特殊疑问意义 ‎ Do you know what he wants to buy? 你知道他想要买什么吗？‎ ‎ ㈣从句时态要与主句一致 ‎ 当主句是一般现在时，从句根据情况使用任何时态 ‎ He says (that ) he is at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎ I don’t know (that) she is singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。‎ She wants to know if I have finished my homework. ‎ 她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。‎ ‎ Do you know when he will be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？‎ ‎ 当主句是一般过去时，从句应使用过去某时态(一般过去时,过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时) ‎ ‎ He said (that) he was at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎ I didn’t know that she was singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。‎ She wanted to know if I had finished m homework. ‎ 她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。‎ Did you know when he would be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？‎ 二、短语 ‎1、give it to charity 把它捐给慈善机构 ‎ ‎2、medical research 医学研究 ‎3、What if …… 如果…怎么样？ ‎ ‎4、get nervous 紧张 ‎5、take a big exam 参加大考 ‎ ‎6、help with 有助于 ‎7、in public 在公共场合 ‎ ‎8、hardly ever 几乎不 ‎9、the whole school 全校 ‎ ‎10、without permission 为经许可 ‎11、be(make) friends with 与…交朋友 ‎ ‎12、ask one’s permission 请求××的允许 ‎13、introduce…to… 把…介绍给… ‎ ‎14、invite…to do… 邀请…干…‎ ‎15、social situations 社会环境 ‎ ‎16、not… in the slightest 根本不，一点也不 ‎ ‎17、right away 立刻，马上 ‎ ‎18、all day 全天 ‎19、be friendly to 对…友好 ‎ ‎20、at lunch time 在午饭时间 ‎21、a bit shy 有点害羞 ‎ ‎22、English speech contest 英语演讲比赛 ‎23、represent the class 代表班级 ‎ ‎24、come top 名列第一（前茅）‎ ‎25、let … down 使…失望 ‎ ‎26、come up with 提出、想出 ‎27、be sure of + n./pron. ‎ be sure to do 相信… be sure +that 从句 ‎ ‎28、the rest of the students 其余的学生 ‎29、have a lot of experience (in) doing sth 在做某事方面有经验 ‎30、deal with 对付，处理 ‎ ‎31、come out 出版 ‎32、give advice on… 在…方面提出意见、建议 ‎ ‎33、by accident 偶然地，无意之中 ‎34、hurry to do sth 匆匆忙忙干… ‎ ‎35、an internet friend 网友 三、句子 ‎1.He doesn’t know if he should bring a present. 他不知道是否该带礼物。‎ ‎2.You shouldn’t worry about what other people say.‎ 你不应该考虑别人说什么。‎ ‎3.What will you do if you had a million dollars? ‎ 如果你有一百万美元，你会干什么？‎ ‎4.If I were you, I ‘d take a small present.‎ 如果我是你，我会带一个小礼物。‎ ‎5.I’m too tired to do well.我太累了，没考好。‎ ‎6.Dogs can be a lot of trouble.狗会带来很多麻烦。‎ ‎7.What are you like? 你是什么样的人？‎ ‎8.I’d invite him/her to have dinner at my house.‎ 我会邀请他（她）到我家吃饭。‎ ‎9.You enjoy the company of other people.你喜欢别人的陪伴。‎ ‎10. I feel nervous talking in front of many people.‎ 我在众人面前讲话时感到紧张。‎ ‎11.She always comes top in the school exams.‎ 她在学校的考试中总是名列前茅。‎ ‎12.She doesn’t want to let her friends down.她不愿让朋友失望。‎ ‎13.If I were you, I’ll get out of here.如果我是你，我会离开这里。‎ ‎ 虚拟语气 一、词的语气 指我们平常说的说话人说话的口气。（在英语中，语气除了指语调以外，最主要的是通过动词发生变化而表示不同语气）‎ 英语中的语气分为三类：‎ 陈述语气（用于陈述句、疑问句、感叹句）‎ 祈使语气（用于祈使句）‎ ‎ 虚拟语气（用于条件状语从句、宾语从句等）‎ 二、虚拟语气 如果所说的不是事实，而是一种假设、愿望、建议或是一种实现不了的空想，就用虚拟语气。‎ 三、虚拟语气在非真实条件状语从句中的用法 ‎1、真实条件状语从句与非真实条件状语从句 ‎ eg If he doesn’t hurry up, he will miss the bus.( 真实条件状语)‎ ‎ If he was free, he asked me to tell stories.（真实条件状语）‎ If I were you, I would go at once.（非真实条件状语从句）‎ If there was no air, people would die.（非真实条件状语从句）‎ ‎2、虚拟语气在非真实条件状语从句中的用法及动词形式 ‎①    表示与现在事实相反的情况 ‎ If I were you, I’d take an umbrella.如果我是你，我会带把伞。‎ If I knew his telephone number, I would tell you. ‎ 如果我知道他的电话号码，我就会告诉你。（事实：不知道）‎ If there were no air or water, there would be no living things on the earth.‎ 如果没有水和空气，地球上就不会有生物。(事实：地球上既有空气也有水)‎ ‎ If I had any money with me, I could lend you some.‎ 如果我带钱了，我就会借给你些。（事实：没带钱）‎ ‎ If he studied harder, he might pass the exam.如果他在努力些，就能通过考试了。（事实：学习不用功）‎ ‎ ②表示与过去事实相反的情况 从句谓语动词形式 主句谓语动词形式 Had+过去分词 Should/would/could/might+have+过去分词 从句 例句 主句 ‎ ①were If+主语 ② did ‎③were to do ‎ ‎(①通常与一个表示时间状语连用)其 中were to do可能性最小，‎ should+动词原形。 ‎ If it rained tomorrow our picnic ‎ would be put off.‎ 假如那天下雨，我们的郊游就推迟。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ 主句+should/would /might /could+动词原形 ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎（条件）从句谓语动词形式 主句谓语动词形式 谓语动词用过去式（be用were）‎ should/would/could/might+动词原形 ‎ eg If I had got there earlier, I should/could have met her.‎ 如果我早到那儿，我就会见到她。（事实：去晚了）‎ ‎ If he had taken my advice, he would not have made such a mistake.‎ 如果他听我的劝告的话，就不会犯这样的错误了。（事实：没有听我的话）‎ ‎ ③表示对将来情况的主观推测（可能相反或可能性很小）‎ eg: If he would come here tomorrow, I should/would talk to him.‎ ‎ 如果他哪天来这儿的话，我就跟他谈谈。（事实：来的可能性很小）‎ ‎ If there were a heavy snow next Sunday, we would not go skating.‎ ‎ 如果下周日下大雪，我们就不能去滑冰了，（事实：不知能否下雪）‎ If she were to be there next Monday, I would tell her about the matter.‎ 如果她下周一来这儿的话，我就会告诉她这件事得始末。‎ 四、虚拟语气的其他用法 ‎1、虚拟语气用在wish 后的宾语从句 a、表示与现在事实相反的愿望，谓语动词用过去式 eg: I wish I had your brains.我希望我有你那样的头脑。(事实：我根本比不上你)‎ b、表示过去事实相反的愿望，谓语动词：had+v-ed eg: I wish I had known the truth of the matter.我希望我原来知道这件事的真相。（事实：原来不知道）‎ c、表示将来难以实现的愿望 谓语动词：should/would + 动词原形 eg: I wish I should have a chance again.很难再有这样的机会了。（事实：很难再有这样的机会了）‎ ‎②虚拟语气用在suggest(建议)、insist(坚持)、demand(要求)、order(命令)等动词后的宾语从句中。‎ 在这种用法中，无论主句谓语动词为何种时态，从句的谓语动词都用：“should + 动 词原形”或只用“动词原形”。‎ 如 He suggested ‎ He insisted ‎ He demand that we (should) take the teacher’s advice ‎ He ordered Unit 5‎ 一、知识点：‎ ‎1.情态动词must, may , might, could, may , can’t表示推测含义与用法后面都接动词原形，都可以表示对现在情况的揣测和推断但他们 ‎ 含义有所不同 ‎ must 一定 肯定 (100%的可能性)‎ ‎ may, might, could有可能，也许 (20%－80%的可能性)‎ ‎　 can’t 不可能，不会 (可能性几乎为零)‎ ‎　 The dictionary must be mine. It has my name on it. ‎ ‎ The CD might/could/may belong to Tony because ‎ he likes listening to pop music.‎ ‎ The hair band can’t be Bob’s. After all, he is boy!‎ ‎2. whose 谁的　疑问词　作定语　后面接名词 如：Whose book is this? This is Lily’s.‎ ‎3. belong to 属于　如：‎ ‎ That English book belongs to me.（不能用名词性的物主代词）‎ ‎4. 当play 指弹奏乐器时，常在乐器前用定冠词　如：‎ ‎　　play the guitar play the piano play the violin 当play 指进行球类运动时，则不用定冠词　如：‎ ‎　 play football play basketball play baseball ‎5. if引导的条件状语从句，主句用一般将来时，‎ 从句用一般现在时代替将来时　如：‎ ‎　　If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late.如果你不快点，你将会迟到 ‎6. if you have any idea== if you know 如果你知道 ‎7. on　关于（学术，科目）‎ ‎8. try to do sth. 尝试做某事　如：‎ ‎　　I try to climb the tree. 我尝试爬树。‎ ‎9. because of , because ‎ ‎ because of + 名词/代词/名词性短语 ‎ because +　从句　　如：‎ ‎　　I do it because I like it. 我做这件事是因为我喜欢。‎ ‎ I had to move because of my job. 因为工作的原因我得搬家。‎ ‎10. own v.－owner n. listen v.－listener n. learn v.－learner n.‎ ‎11. catch a bus 赶公车 ‎12. neighbor 邻居　指人 ‎ neighborhood 邻居　指地区也可指附近地区的人　‎ ‎13. local 当地的　如：local teacher 当地的教师 ‎14. noise n. 噪音　是个可数名词　noises ‎ ‎15. call the police 报警　如：Quick! Call the police! 快！叫警察！‎ ‎16. anything strange 一些奇怪的东西 当形容词修饰something, anything, nothing, everything等不定代词时，放在这些词的后面 ‎17. there be sb./ sth. doing 如：‎ ‎　　There is a cat eating fish.‎ ‎ There must be something visiting our home.‎ ‎18. escape from …从哪里逃跑出来　如：‎ ‎ He escaped from the burning building. 他从燃烧的大概中逃出来。‎ ‎19. an ocean of + 名词　极多的，用不尽的　如：an ocean of energy.‎ ‎20. unhappy 不高兴的　反义词 happy 高兴的 ‎ ‎21. final adj. 最后的　finally adv. 最后地 ‎22. dishonest 不诚实的　反义词 honest 诚实的。‎ ‎23. get on 上车 get off 下车　‎ ‎24. use up 用光、用完　如：They have used up all the money. ‎ 他们已经用完了所有的钱。‎ ‎25. attempt to do 试图　如：‎ ‎　　The boys attempted to leave for Beijing. 男孩子们试图想去北京。‎ ‎26. wake 动词　唤醒　常用的词组：wake up　意为醒来　如：‎ ‎　　Please wake me up at 8 o’clock.　请在8点钟叫醒我。‎ ‎27. look for 寻找　指过程 find 找　指结果　　如：‎ ‎　　I am looking for a pen. 我正在找一支笔。（指找的过程）‎ ‎　　I found my pen just now. 我刚刚找到了我的笔。（指找的结果）‎ ‎28. hear 听　指听的结果 listen 听 指听的过程　如：‎ ‎　　Did you hear ? 你听到了吗？（指听的结果，听或没听到）‎ ‎　　I often listen to the music. 我经常听音乐。（指听的过程）‎ ‎29. try one’s best to do sth. 尽某人的最大努力去做某事　如：‎ ‎　　He tried his best to run. 他尽他的最大努力去跑。‎ ‎30. 名词所有格　‎ ‎　　名词所有格的构成有两种形式 ‎　①是在名词后面加 ’s 或是以s结尾 的名词，只在名词的后面加 ’ ‎ 如：Ann’s book　安的书, our teachers’ office我们老师们的办公室 ‎ 注：双方共有的所有格，只在后面一个名词加’s,　如：‎ ‎　　Lily and Lucy’s father 莉莉和露西的爸爸（她们的爸爸是同一个人）‎ ‎　②有…of …介词短语表示无生命东西的所有格　如：‎ ‎　　 a picture of my family 我家人的相片　‎ ‎　　有时也有’s表示无生命的东西的所有格　如：‎ ‎　　　today’s newspaper,　　the city’s name ‎ ‎31、happen指偶然的发生；‎ take place用于计划好的事情或自然的发生；（二者无被动语态）‎ happen to do sth碰巧干某事. happen to sb.某人发生了什么事 ‎32、raise [reiz] 及物动词 举起、提高 ；募捐 用外力升起，如升旗 rise（不及物动词）上升。自然升起，如价格上涨，日出等。 ‎ Raise the money for charity. Raise the Five-red-star flag ‎33、hope to do sth；hope that从句。 ‎ wish to do sth；wish sb to do sth；wish that从句。‎ ‎34、however与but：‎ ‎（1）从语义上看，but所表示的是很明显的对比、转折。‎ ‎（2）从语法上看，but是并列连词，however是个副词。‎ ‎（3）从语序上看，but总位于所引导的句首，however可放在句首、句中、句尾。‎ ‎（4）从标点上看，but之后没有逗号，however之前、之后短语用逗号隔开。‎ 在完成时态 ‎⑴由have/ has ＋　过去分词 ‎⑵表示过去发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果 常与already, just , yet , ever, never 连用 Have you finished your work yet？你完成了你的工作了吗？‎ Yes, I have. I have just finished it.　是的。我刚刚完成了。‎ I have already finished it .　我已经完成了。‎ Have you ever been to China?　你曾经去过中国吗？‎ No, I have never been there.　没有，我从来也没有去过。‎ ‎⑶①表示过去已经开始，持续到现在的动作　或状态和表示过去某一时刻延续到现在（包括现在在内）的一段时间的状态连用如：（for + 时间段，since + 时间点，或过去某一动作， 以及how long ）‎ ‎②注： 非延续性动词在现在完成 时态中不能和for, since 引导的表示一段时间的状语的肯定句连用。‎ 应转为相应的延续性动词 如：‎ buy---- have die---- be dead join ---- be in ‎ borrow----- keep leave---- be away ‎ I have bought a pen.------ I have had a pen for 2 weeks.‎ The dog has died.------- The dog has been dead since last week.‎ ‎⑷①have (has) been to + 地点 去过某地 已经回来 ‎②have (has) gone to + 地点 去了某地 没有回来 ‎③have been in + 地点 一直呆在某地 没有离开过 如：‎ She has been to Shanghai. 她去过上海。(已经回来)‎ She has gone to Shanghai. 她去了上海。(没有回来)‎ She has been in Shanghai for 2 days.她呆上海两天了。(没有离开过上海)‎ 二、短语：‎ ‎1、be long to属于 ‎ ‎2、listen to classical music听古典音乐 ‎ ‎3、at school上学、求学、在学校 ‎ ‎4、go to the concert去听音乐会 ‎ ‎5、have any/some idea知道 have no idea不知道 ‎6、a math test on algebra有关代数的数学考试 ‎ ‎7、the final exam期末考试 ‎ ‎8、because of因为 ‎ ‎9、a present for his mother送给她妈妈的礼物 ‎ ‎10、run for exercise跑步锻炼 ‎ ‎11、wear a suit穿西装 ‎12、make a movie拍电影 ‎13、in our neighborhood在我们附近、在我们小区 ‎14、have fun玩耍、取闹 ‎15、his or her own idea她（他）自己的看法 ‎16、late night深夜 ‎17、an ocean of许许多多、无穷无尽的 ‎18、be care of=look out当心、小心 ‎19、pretend to do sth假装干…‎ ‎20、use up用完、用光 三、句子：‎ ‎1、If you have any idea where might be please call me.‎ 如果你知道它可能在哪，请打电话给我。‎ ‎2、It’s crucial that I study for it because it counts 30%to the final exam.‎ 关键是我必须学，因为它占期末考试的30%。‎ ‎3、What do you think “anxious” means?‎ 你认为“anxious”是什么意思？‎ ‎4、He could be running for exercise.他可能是跑步锻炼身体。‎ ‎5、He might be running to catch a bus.他可能是在跑着赶公共汽车。‎ ‎6、Why do you think the man is running?你觉得那个男的为什么跑？‎ ‎7、No more mystery in Bell Tower neighborhood.‎ 钟塔附近不再有神秘的事了。‎ Unit 6‎ 一、 知识点 ‎1.prefer v.更喜爱，更喜欢，相当于like……better，其过去式、过去分词为preferred，常用于以下结构： ‎ ‎(1)prefer+名词、代词I preferred music. Which do you prefer?‎ ‎(2)prefer+动词不定式“宁愿干……”‎ She prefers to live among the working people.‎ ‎(3) prefer+v-ing I prefer living abroad.‎ ‎(4)prefer+动词不定式复合结构:‎ 常见的搭配有:‎ ‎①prefer……to……喜欢……而不喜欢……（to为介词）‎ She prefers apples to bananas.‎ ‎②prefer doing to doing（to为介词）‎ He prefers running to walking.‎ ‎③prefer to do …… rather than do sth.宁愿干……而不愿干……‎ They prefer to play games rather than watch TV.‎ ‎2.gentle: ①轻柔，温和（往往指音乐、嗓音或风）‎ ‎②温柔的，文雅的（往往指人的性格）‎ ‎3.remind……of……使某人回想起或意识到某人、某事 She reminded me of her sister.‎ The pictures remind me of my school days.‎ ‎4.表示“也”的用法：‎ also 用在句中，too 用在句末，as well 多用于口语，用在句末，这三个表达都用在肯定句。either “也” 用在否定句尾 ‎5. What do you think of …? =How do you like…?‎ ‎6.as 的用法：‎ ‎①用作连词“按照”‎ Please do it again as I told you.‎ ‎②连词，当……的时候，着重强调两个动词同时发生 She sang as she worked.‎ ‎③表示原因，“因为，由于”比较口语化，语气也较弱，所表示的原因比较明显。‎ As I didn’t know the way, I asked the policeman.‎ ‎④as…as… 和……一样 ‎ ‎7.over the years多年来 ，往往与现在完成时连用 ‎8.though 不做副词“可是，不过，然而”放在句尾 ‎9. be sure of +n. / pron. /短语 ‎ be sure that 从句 ｝相信，对……有把握 ‎ be sure to do 务必……一定……‎ make sure 确保，核实，查收，弄清楚 ‎10.one of the+最高级+复数名词，最……之一 ‎11.过去分词作定语，表示被动或完成 ‎12. on display=on show ‎13.interest:①n.兴趣，趣味；②v.使感兴趣 He interested me in football.他使我对足球感兴趣。‎ I’ve got a lot of books that might interest you.我有许多可能使你感兴趣的书。‎ ‎14.class 等级，级别，阶级 ‎15. whatever=no matter what ‎16.suggest:①建议，后跟宾语从句，用虚拟语气；‎ ‎②表示，暗示，后跟宾语从句，不用虚拟语气。‎ ‎17. energy (n.)=energetic (adj.)‎ ‎18.honest 该词是元音发音开头，前面的不定冠词用“an”.‎ ‎19.先行词若为地点或时间时，后面的关系词用关系代词还是关系副词，要看关系词在定语从句中作什么成分。若关系词作定语从句的主语、宾语或定语，用关系代词；若关系词作状语，则用关系副词。‎ ‎20. along with 伴随… 同… 一道 ‎ I will go along with you. 我同你一道去。‎ ‎ I sing along with music. 我伴随着音乐唱歌。‎ ‎21. dance to sth. 随着…跳舞 ‎ ‎ She likes dancing to the music. 她喜欢随着音乐而跳舞。‎ ‎22. different kinds of 各种各样different kinds of clothes 各种各样的衣服 ‎23. music n. 音乐 musician n. 音乐家 musical ‎ ‎24. take … to … 带…去…. 如：‎ ‎ My father often takes me to the park. 我的爸爸经常带我去公园。‎ ‎ Please take this box to my office. 请拿这个盒子到我的办公室。‎ ‎25. be important to sb. 对…重要 ‎ be important for sb. to do. 做某事对某人很重要 ‎26. though == although 作连词 虽然，尽管 ‎ 放在句子中间/句首，不能和but 连用 Though it was very late, he went on working. 虽然很晚了，但他还在工作 Mr. Smith , though he was young, did it very well.‎ 史密斯先生虽然年轻，却做得很好。‎ ‎27. energy n. 活力 energetic adj. 有活力的 ‎28. most of … …的大多数 ‎29. keep healthy 保持健康 ‎30. get together 聚在一起 ‎31. be bad for sth. 对…有坏处的 ‎ be bad for doing sth. 做…有坏处 ‎32. take care of === look after 照顾 关心 如：‎ ‎ She often takes care of / looks after her son.‎ ‎33 stay away from 远离… 如：‎ ‎ Stay away from me , I have a cold. 请远离我，我得了感冒 ‎34. to be honest 老实说 如： ‎ ‎ To be honest I really like flowers. 老实说我真的很喜欢花。‎ ‎35. dislike 不喜欢 反义词 like 喜欢 ‎36. fisherman 渔夫 复数形式 fishermen ‎ ‎37. photography n. 摄影 photograph n. 照片 相片 ‎ photographer n. 摄影师 ‎38. be in agreement 意见一致 常与介词on /about连用如：‎ ‎ They are in agreement on that question. 他们对那个问题意见一致。‎ ‎39. mainly adv. 主要地 首要地 main adj. 主要的 二.短语 ‎1.expect to do sth.期望干……‎ expect sb. to do sth期望某人干…… ‎ ‎2.catch up with追上，赶上 ‎3.different kinds of music各种不同的音乐 ‎4.quiet and gentle songs轻柔的歌曲 ‎ ‎5. take…to… 带……到……‎ ‎6. remind…of…使某人想起或意识到…… ‎ ‎7.her own songs她自己的歌曲 ‎8.be important to对……重要 ‎ ‎9.Yellow River黄河 ‎10.Hong Tao’s latest movie洪涛最近的电影 ‎ ‎11.over the years多年来 ‎12.be sure to do sth.务必干……一定干……‎ ‎13.one of the best known Chinese photographers世界上最有名的中国摄影家之一 ‎14.on display展览，展出 ‎ ‎15.come and go来来往往 ‎16.can’t stand不能忍受 ‎ ‎17.look for寻找 ‎18.feel sick感到恶心，不舒服 ‎ ‎19.have a great time玩得高兴，过得愉快 ‎20.to be honest说实话 ‎ ‎21.be lucky to do幸运的是……‎ ‎22.my six-month English course我6个月的英语课 ‎23.most of my friends我的大部分朋友 ‎ ‎24.go for去找某人，想法得到某事物 ‎25.stay healthy保持健康 ‎ ‎26.French fries薯条 ‎27.stay away from与……保持距离 ‎ ‎28.be in agreement意见一致（后跟短语、句子）‎ ‎29.barbecued meat烤肉 ‎ ‎30.a tag question反意疑问句 ‎31.be bad for对……有害 三．句子 ‎1.I love singers who write their own music.我喜欢自己创作曲子的歌手。‎ ‎2.We prefer music that has great lyrics.我们更喜欢歌词很棒的曲子。‎ ‎3.What do you dislike about this CD.你不喜欢这张CD的什么？‎ ‎4.What does it remind you of？它使你想起了什么？‎ ‎5.The music reminds me of Brazilian dance music.这首曲子使我想起了巴西舞曲。‎ ‎6.It does have a few good features, though.‎ 然而，它的确也有一些好的方面。‎ ‎7.She really has something for everyone.‎ 每个人的确都能从她的作品中领悟到一些东西。‎ ‎8.Whatever you do, don’t miss this exhibition.‎ 无论怎样，你都不能错过这次展出。‎ ‎9.As the name suggests, the band has a lot of energy.‎ 正如乐队名字所暗示的那样，这支乐队很有活力。‎ ‎10. Some people say they are boring, but others say they are great.‎ ‎11.If I were you, I’d eat nuts instead.如果我是你，我会改吃坚果。‎ Unit7‎ 一、知识点：‎ ‎1. tired 累的 tiring 令人疲惫的 ‎ bored 讨厌 boring 令人厌烦/讨厌的 ‎ excited 兴奋的 exciting 令人兴奋/激动的 ‎ amazed 惊讶的 amazing 令人惊讶的 ‎2. education n. 教育 educational 有教育意义的 ‎3. 想要做…：would like to do ‎ 想要…：would like sth. ‎ ‎ 常用的句型有：‎ ‎ What would you like to do? 你想要做什么？‎ ‎ I would like to visit GuiLin. 我想去参观桂林。‎ ‎ What would you like ? 你想要什么？‎ I would like some tea. 我想来些茶。‎ Would you like to go to my party? 你来不来参加我的晚会？‎ ‎(表邀请) Yes, I’d love/ like to . No, thanks.‎ Would you like some tea or coffee? 你是要点茶还是咖啡？‎ Yes, I’d love/ like. No. thanks.‎ Where would you like to visit/ go? 你想去哪呢？(本单元的重点句型)‎ ‎4. go on vacation 去度假 ‎ go on a trip 去旅行 ‎ go on a picnic 去野炊 ‎5. hope to do 希望做某事 I hope to go to Beijing. 我希望去北京。‎ ‎ hope (that) + 从句 希望….‎ I hope that I can go to Beijing.我希望我能去北京。‎ ‎ I hope (that) she can pass the test.我希望她能通过考试。‎ ‎6. I love places where the people are friendly. 我喜欢人们友好的地方。‎ ‎ where 关系副词，引导定语从句 ‎ where引导定语从句修饰表示地点的先行词如：the place, the city等 ‎ That is the school where I studied 10 years ago. 那就是我10年前所就读的学校。‎ ‎7. 不定代词 参看课本P141 ‎ ‎ 注：形容词必须放在不定代词、不定副词的后面 ‎8. consider doing考虑做某事 ‎ I am considering changing my job. 我正在考虑换工作。‎ ‎9. cost (sb.) 钱、时间 The book cost me 10 yuan 这本书花了我10元。‎ ‎10. in general 一般来说， 大体上， 通常 ‎11. be supposed to do 应该做…. === should 如：‎ ‎ Scientists are supposed to know a lot. 科学家们应该知道更多。‎ ‎12. take a trip 去旅行 ‎13. provide sb. with sth 供应某人某物=== provide sth for sb. ‎ ‎ 如：They provide us with water.‎ ‎ They provide water for us.‎ ‎14. how far 问路程　多远（20 kilometers , five munites’ walk）‎ ‎ how old 问年龄　多少岁（13 years old）‎ ‎ how long 问时间 多久；多长（since, for）‎ ‎ how often 问频率　多久一次（sometimes, often, 3 times a day, every day）‎ ‎15. be away 离开　如：‎ ‎　　I was away 2days ago. 我两天前离开了。‎ ‎ I will be away for a few days.　我将离开一些天。‎ ‎16. inexpensive adj. 不贵的 反义词　expensive adj. 贵的 ‎17.　 let sb. do 让某人做某事　Let me help you.让我帮你吧。‎ ‎　　　let sb. not do 让某人不要做某Let us not laugh. 让我们不要笑了。‎ ‎18. in the future 将来　‎ She will a good mother in the future. 在将来她将会是一个好妈妈。‎ ‎19. 用to 表示　“的”有： ‎ answers to question 问题的答案 ‎　 the key to the door 这扇门的钥匙 ‎20. as soon as possible 尽可能的快 ‎21. continue doing == go on doing 继续做某事　如：‎ ‎ She continued singing. == She went on singing. 她继续唱歌。‎ ‎22. according to 根据 ‎ ‎23. be willing to do 愿意做某事 如： ‎ ‎ I am willing to help you. 我愿意帮你。‎ ‎24. on the other hands 另一方面 ‎25. hold on to sth. 保持，不要放弃 ‎ ‎ Please hold on to my hand. 不要放开我的手。‎ ‎26. come true 实现 如：‎ ‎ My dream have come true. 我的梦实现了。‎ ‎27．through 穿过 含有“in”的意思 across 横过 含有“on”的意思 ‎28. Some day=someday 只指将来某一天 one day 既可指将来某一天，也可指过去某一天。‎ ‎28. Plan 计划打算(1) plan to do sth ‎ We are planning to visit London this summer /Do plan to stay late?‎ ‎(2) 跟名词或者代词 Have you planned your trip?‎ We have been planning this visit for months.‎ ‎(3) plan for 为…做计划He planned for a picnic if the next day were fine.‎ ‎(4) plan on 打算有（做某事）She had not planned on so many guests.‎ They are planning on an/for an outing.‎ ‎29.强调句型：It is(was)…that (who ,whom)…‎ ‎(1) 强调句型可用来强调各种句子成分 ‎(2) 强调句中的连词who,whom只用来指代人，that 即可以指代人也可以指代物被强调部分是时间，地点等仍用that ‎ ‎(3)that,whom, who 后的句中的谓语与原句保持一致 ‎(4)强调句中只有it is ,it was 两种时态形式，‎ 如：I am right ------It is I who(that) am right.‎ 又如：They will have a meeting tomorrow.‎ It is they who(that) will have a meeting tomorrow.‎ It′s a meeting that they will have tomorrow.‎ It′s tomorrow that they will have a meeting.‎ ‎30.在英语中，有although 不能有but;有because 不能有so ‎ 二 、短语 ‎1.go on vacation 去度假 ‎ ‎2.trek through the jungle 徒步穿越丛林 ‎3.some day 有朝一日 ‎ ‎4.one of the liveliest cities 最有活力的城市之一 ‎5.be supposed to do sth. 应该干。 ‎ ‎6.pack light clothes 穿薄衣服 ‎7.take a trip 去旅行 ‎8.provide sb with sth = provide sth for sb 为了某人提供某物 ‎9.be away 离开，远离 ‎ ‎10.the answer to the question 问题的答案 ‎11.according to 根据。按照。 1‎ ‎2.work as tour guides 做导游的工作 ‎13.dream of 梦想，想到 ‎ ‎14.less realistic dreams 不现实的梦想 ‎15.be willing to do sth. 愿意干。‎ ‎16.achieve one’s dreams 实现梦想 ‎17.sail across the pacific 横渡太平洋 ‎18.hold on to 保持，不要放弃（卖掉）‎ ‎19.take it easy 从容 轻松 不紧张 ‎ ‎20.Niagara Falls 尼亚加拉大瀑布 ‎21.Eiffel Tower 艾菲尔铁塔 ‎ ‎22.Notre Dame Cathedral 巴黎圣母院 ‎23.this time of year 一年中的这个时候 ‎24.in general 通常 ,大体上, 一般而言 三、句子 ‎1.where would you like to go on vacation?‎ I’d like to trek through the jungle. ‎ ‎2.l like places where the weather is always warm.‎ ‎3.I like to go somewhere relaxing 我喜欢去休闲的地方 ‎4.For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris?‎ 你下次度假为什么不考虑去巴黎？‎ ‎5.Traveling around Paris by taxi can cost a lot of money.‎ 乘坐出租车游览巴黎要花费很多钱 ‎6.So unless you speak French yourself, it’s best to travel with someone who can translate things for you.‎ 因此，除非你自己会讲法语，否则最好与一个能为你翻译的人一起去。‎ ‎7. We’d like to be away for three weeks.‎ 我们大约要去三个星期.‎ ‎8.The person has a lot of money to spend on the vacation. ‎ 度假中这个人有很多钱可以花.‎ ‎9.I hope you can provide me with some information about the kinds of vacations that your firm can offer ‎ 我希望能给我提供一些贵公司能经营的旅游项目的信息.‎ ‎10.Could you please give me some suggestions for vacation spots?‎ 你能给我一些有关度假地的建议吗？‎ ‎11.You need to pack some warm clothes if you go there. ‎ 你如果去那里，需要带一些暖和的衣服。‎ ‎12.I’d love to sail across the Pacific.‎ 我想横渡太平洋。‎ Unit 8‎ 一．知识点： 短语动词小结 常见短语动词结构有下面几种：‎ ‎ 1.动词+副词 如：give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜 ‎ 这种结构有时相当于及物动词，如果其宾语是代词，就必须放在动 词和副词之间，如果是名词，则既可插在动词和副词之间，也可放 在短语动词后。‎ ‎2. 动词+介词 如：listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于 ‎ 这种结构相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语。‎ ‎3. 动词+副词+介词 如：come up with 提出，想出 ‎ run out of 用完，耗尽 ‎ 4. 动词+名词(介词) 如：take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住 ‎1.cheer (sb.) up 使(某人)高兴、振作 如：cheer me up 使我高兴 ‎ clean up 打扫 clean-up n. 打扫 ‎ ‎2. homeless adj. 无家可归的 a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩home n. 家 ‎ ‎4. sick adj. 生病的 作表语、定语 ‎ ‎ ill adj. 生病的 作表语 ，不能作定语 ‎5. volunteer to do v. 志愿效劳、主动贡献 ‎ ‎ volunteer n. 志愿者 ‎ ‎6. come up with 提出 想出 === think up 想出 ‎ catch up with 赶上 追上 ‎7. put off doing 推迟做某事 ‎ put on 穿上 (指过程)‎ ‎ put up 张贴 ‎8. write down 写下 记下 ‎ ‎9. call up 打电话 ‎ make a telephone call 打电话 ‎10. set up 成立 建立 ‎ The new hospital was set up in 2000. 这座医院是在2000年成立的。‎ ‎11. each 每个 各自的 强调第一个人或事物的个别情况 常与of 连用 ‎ every 每个 每一个的 一切的 则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用 ‎12. put …to use 把… 投入使用，利用 ‎ They put the new machine to use. 他们把新机器投入使用 ‎13. help sb. (to) do 帮助某人做某事 help him (to) study ‎ help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做某事 help him with English ‎ help do 帮助做某事 help study ‎ ‎14. plan to do 计划做某事 ‎ plan + 从句 ‎ I plan to go to Beijing. === I plan (that) I will go to Beijing.‎ ‎ 我计划去北京。‎ ‎15. spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing. ‎ 我花了一天的时间去参观北京。‎ ‎ spend… on sth. 花费…在… I spent 3 years on English. ‎ ‎16.not only … but (also) … 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分 ‎ ‎ (1)引导以 not only …but (also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。‎ 因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but (also)…. 是倒装句。也是说得要 把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如：‎ ‎ ①Not only can I do it but (also) I can do best. ‎ 我不仅能做到而且做得最好。‎ ‎ ⑵Not only…but (also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和数的变化 也就是就近原则 如：‎ ‎ ①Not only Lily but (also) you like cat. 不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。‎ ‎ ②Not only you but (also) Lily likes cat. 不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。‎ 常见的就近原则的结构有：‎ ‎ ①Neither… nor…即不…也不… (两者都不)Neither you nor I like him. 我和你都不喜欢他。‎ ‎ ②Either… or… 不是…就是… (两者中的一个)Either Lily or you are a student. ‎ ‎ ③Not only …but (also)…‎ ‎ ④There be ‎ ‎17. join 参加 (指参加团体、组织) 如：join the Party 入党 ‎ take part in 参加 (指参加活动) 如：‎ take part in sports meeting 参加运动会 ‎18. run out 与 run out of ‎ ①run out (become used up). 其主语往往为物。如时间，食物，金钱，油等，本 身就含有被动意义。‎ ‎ His money soon ran out. 他的钱很快就花光了。‎ ‎ My patience has completely run out. 我没有一点耐心了。‎ ‎ Our time is running out. 我们剩下的时间不多了。‎ ‎ ②run out of 主语为人，表示主动含义。‎ ‎ He is always running out of money before pay day. 他总是在发工资的日子还没有到就把钱花完了。‎ ‎ 两者在一定条件下可以互换 ‎ 如：The petrol is running out. 汽油快用完了 ‎= We are running out of petrol. 我们快把汽油用完了。‎ ‎ Our time is running out. 我们剩下的时间不多了。= We are running out of time ‎19. take after (在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像 ‎ be similar to 与..相像 take after 相像 ‎ look after 照顾 take care of 照顾 ‎20. work out v. + adj.‎ ‎ ①结局，结果为 ‎ The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. 他提出的这个策略效果很好。‎ ‎ ②算出，制订出，消耗完（精力等）‎ ‎ He never seems to be worked out. 他好像永远不会疲乏似的。‎ ‎ He worked out a plan. 他制订了一个计划。‎ ‎ I have worked out our total expenses. 我已经算出了我们总的费用。‎ ‎21. hang out 闲荡 闲逛 ‎ ‎ I like to hang out at mall with my friends. 我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。‎ ‎22. be able to do 能 会 ‎ ‎ be unable to do 不能 不会 ‎ ‎23. thank you for doing 谢谢做某事 如：‎ ‎ thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我 ‎24. for sure 确实如此，毫无疑问 ‎ You don’t have money. That’s for sure. 你没有钱，这是毫无疑问的。‎ ‎25. fill… with… 使…充满… 用…填充…‎ ‎ She filled the bowl with water. 她用水填满碗。‎ ‎26. like prep. 像… ‎ ‎27. help sb. out 帮助…做事，解决难题(摆脱困境)‎ ‎ I can’t work out this math problem. Please help me out. ‎ 我不能算出这道数学问题，请你帮我解决。‎ ‎28. train n. 火车 train v. 训练 ‎ train sb. to do. 训练某人做某事 ‎ She trains her dog to fetch things. 她训练她的狗去取东西。‎ ‎29. at once == right away 立刻 马上 如：‎ ‎ Do it at once. 马上去做。‎ ‎ I’ll go there at once/ right away. 我马上去那里。‎ ‎30. one day 有一天 (指将来/过去) some day 有一天(指将来) 如：‎ ‎ One day I went to Beijing. 有一天我去了北京。‎ ‎ Some day I’ll go to Beijing. 有一天我将去北京。‎ ‎31. specially adv. 特意地 专门地 特别地 special adj. 特别的 ‎32. donation n. 捐赠物 donate v. 捐赠 赠送 ‎33. part of speech 词性 词类 ‎34. disabled adj. 肢体有残疾的 disable v. 不能 ‎35. hand out 分发 hand out bananas ‎ ‎ give out 分发 give out sth to sb. 分….给某人 ‎ give up doing 放弃… give up smoking 放弃吸烟 ‎ give away 赠送 捐赠 give away sth. to …. give away money to kids ‎ ‎ give sb. sth. 给某人某东西 give me money 给我钱 ‎ give sth. to sb. 给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线 ‎36. volunteer ①可数名词 “志愿者” ②adj. 自愿的 ‎  vi. volunteer to do sth They are the Chinese People’s Volunteers. 他们是中国人民志愿军。‎ I volunteer to help you. 我自愿帮助你。‎ ‎ 37. no longer = not … any longer 指时间上不再延续。‎ ‎ no more = not … any more 指动作上不再延续。‎ 二．短语 ‎1.clean up 清扫 ‎ ‎2.give out 分发，发放 ‎3.cheer up=make…happier 使...高兴，使...振作 ‎4.after school study program 课外学习班 ‎5.come up with=think up 提出，想出 ‎ ‎6.put off 推迟 ‎7.write down 写下，记下 ‎ ‎8.put up 张贴 ‎9.hand out 分发，发放 ‎ ‎10.call up 打电话 ‎11.ser up=establish 建立 ‎ ‎12.be home to sb 是某人的家园 ‎13.volunteer one’s time to do sth 自愿花时间干...‎ ‎14.put…to use… 把...投入使用 ‎ ‎15.elementary school 小学 ‎16.plan to do sth 计划干...打算干 ‎17.coach a football team for kids 训练少年足球队 ‎18.start a Chinese History club 开办一个中国史俱乐部 ‎19.run out of 用完，耗尽 ‎ ‎20.take after 在性格或长相方面与父母相象 ‎21.fix up 修理 ‎ ‎22.give away 捐赠 ‎ ‎23.be similar to 与...相似 ‎24.ask for 索要 ‎ ‎25.a call-in center for parents 家长热线 ‎26.hang out 闲荡 ‎ ‎27.put up signs asking for singing jobs 张贴寻求唱歌工作的广告 ‎28.run out of money for singing lessons 学唱歌的钱用完了 ‎29.disabled people 残疾人 ‎ ‎30.for sure 确实如此，毫无疑问 ‎31.fill…with... 用...填充... be full of 装满了...‎ ‎32.help...out 帮助...做事，解决难题（摆脱困境）‎ ‎33.a specially trained dog 一只经过特殊训练的狗 ‎34.train sb to do sth 训练某人干... ‎ ‎35.fetch my book 把我的书拿来 ‎36.part of speech 词性 三．句子 ‎1．We can’t put off making a plan. Clean-up Day is only two weeks from ‎ now. 我们不能推迟制订计划，清洁日离现在只有两周了。‎ ‎2．She puts this love to good use by working in the after-school care centre at her local elementary school. 她在当地的一所小学的课后辅导中心工作，使这个爱好得到较好的利用 ‎3．Not only do I feel good about helping other people, but I get to spend time doing what I love to do. 帮助别人不但自己感到快乐，而且我开始花时间做自己喜欢做的事了。‎ ‎4．The three students plan to set up a student volunteer project at heir school. 这三个学生计划在他们校开展一个学生志愿者项目。‎ ‎5.He also put up some sign asking for old bikes.他还贴了一些需求旧自行车的告。‎ ‎6.The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. 几米想出的这个办法很效。‎ ‎7．He did a radio interview. 他接受了电台的采访。‎ ‎8．We need to come up with a plan. 我们需要指定一个计划。‎ ‎9．You could help clean up the city parks. 你可以帮助打扫城市公园。‎ ‎10．He now has sixteen bikes to fix up and give away to children who ‎ don’t have bikes. 他现在有16辆要修理的自行车，并准备把这些修好的自行车赠送给那些没有自行车的孩子。‎ ‎ Unit9‎ ‎1. 被动语态 ‎ ‎(1). 被动语态表示句子的主语是谓语动词所表示的动作承受者。‎ ‎ (2). 被动语态基本结构：be+及物动词的过去分词 ‎(如果是不用物动词，其过去分词应带有相应的介词)‎ ‎ (3). 被动语态中的be 是助动词，有人称、数和时态的变化。‎ ‎ 一般现在时被动语态为：am/is/are+过去分词 ‎ 一般过去时被动语态为：was/were+ 过去分词 ‎ 与情态动词连用的被动语态：情态动词+ be + 过去分词 ‎ (4). 被动语态中动作的发出者或执行者做介词by的宾语，放在句 末，by 表示“由，被”的意思 如何理解被动语态？‎ ‎ 为取胜更清晰、更深刻地理解被动语态的含义，可以将主动语态和被动语态的句子结构进行比较。‎ ‎ 主动语态： 主语+ 谓语动词 + 宾语 + 其他成分 ‎ 被动语态： 主语+ be +过去分词 + by +宾语 +其他成分 ‎ 如： Many people speak English.‎ 被动语态 English is spoken by many people.‎ ‎2. 本单元要掌握的句型 见课本P69 中的Grammar Focus ‎ ‎3. invent v. 发明 inventor n. 发明家 invention n. 发明 可数名词 ‎4. be used for doing用来做…(是被动语态) 如：‎ ‎ Pens are used for writing. 笔是用来写的。 ‎ Pens aren’t used for eating. 笔不是用来吃的。‎ ‎5. 给某人某样东西 give sth. to sb. 如：I gave a pen to him. 我给他一支笔。‎ ‎ give sb. sth. I gave him a pen. 我给他一支笔。‎ ‎6. all day 整天 ‎7. salty adj. 咸的 salt n. 盐 ‎8. by mistake 错误地 如：‎ ‎ I took the umbrella by mistake. 我不小心拿错了雨伞。‎ ‎9. make sb./sth. +形容词 使…怎么样 It made me happy. 它使我高兴 ‎ make sb./sth. +名词 让…做… It made me laugh. 它让我发笑 ‎10. by accident 意外 偶然 I met her by accident at bus stop. ‎ 我在公共汽车站意外地见到了她。‎ ‎11. not…until… 直到…才做… 如：‎ I didn’t go to bed until I finished my work. 我直到完成我的工作才去睡觉。‎ ‎12. according to +名词 根据… 如： according to an legend according to this article根据这篇文章 根据一个神话 ‎13. over an open fire 野饮 ‎ ‎14. leaf n. 叶子 复数形式 leaves ‎15. nearby adj. 附近的 如： the nearby river ‎16. fall into 落入 掉进 如：The leaf fell into the river. 叶子落入了河里。fall down 摔倒 如：She fell down from her bike. ‎ 她从她自行车摔倒了。‎ ‎17. quite 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的后面 ‎ ‎ 如： quite a beautiful girl 一个漂亮的女孩 ‎ very 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的前面 ‎ ‎ 如： a very beautiful girl 一个漂亮女孩 ‎ 注：当不与冠词a 连用时，两者可以互用 如：‎ ‎ I am very happy.=== I am quite happy. 我非常高兴。‎ ‎18. in the way 这样 ‎ ‎19. pleased adj. 表示外部因素引起人发自内心的欣慰和愉快 ‎ pleasant adj. 愉快 高兴 指天气、时间、旅行令人高兴愉快 ‎ please v. 使高兴 使同意 ‎20. battery—operated adj. 电池控制的是名词+动词的运动分词构成的合成形容词 ‎21. in the sixth century 在第6世纪 ‎ ‎22. travel around 周游 ‎23. more than === over 超过 如： more than 300 == over 300 超过300‎ ‎24. including prep. 介词 包括 可以与名词和动名词连用 ‎ 如: Six people, including a baby, were hurt. 6个人包括一个小孩受伤了。‎ ‎25. have been played 被上演 是现在完成时的被动语态 ‎ 现在完成时的被动语态的结构：have /has been +过去分词 ‎26. be born 出生 He was born in Canada. 他在加拿大出生 ‎27. safety n. 安全 safe adj. 安全的 ‎28. knock into 撞上(某人)‎ ‎29. divide sth. into … 将…划分成..‎ 通常指将一个整体分成几个对应相对的部分 如：‎ Let’s divide ourselves into 4groups. 让我们把我们自己划成4组。‎ ‎30. since then 自从那以后 常与完成时 态连用 如：‎ ‎ Since then, I have left Beijing. 自从那以后，我已经离开了北京。‎ Unit10‎ ‎1. 过去完成时 ‎(1) 构成：由助动词had + 过去分词 构成 ‎ 否定式：had not + 过去分词 缩写形式：hadn’t ‎ ‎(2) 用法:过去完成时表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作。‎ ‎ (3) 它所表示的时间是“过去的过去”。‎ ‎①表示过去某一时间可用by, before 等构成的短语来表示 ‎②也可以用when, before, after 等引导的时间状语从句来表示 ‎ ‎ ③还可以通过宾语从句或通过上下文暗示。‎ When I got there, you had already eaten you meal. 当我到达那里时，你已经开始了。‎ By the time he got here, the bus had left. 到他到达这里时，汽车已经离开了 ‎2. by the time 直到…时候 ‎ 指从过去某一点到从句所示的时间为止的一段时间 如：‎ By the time we got to his house, he had finished supper. ‎ 在我们到达他就已经吃完了晚饭。‎ ‎3. 英语中表示“把某物遗忘在某处”常用 leave + 地点 ,而不是forget+地点 如：Unluckily, I left my book at home不幸的是，我把书忘在家里了。‎ ‎4. close v. 关 adv. 接近地 靠近地 closed adj. 关的 ‎5. come out 出来 ‎ ‎6. on time 按时 准时 既不早也不迟 in time 及时 指在时限到来之前 ‎7. luckily adv. 幸运地 lucky adj. 幸运的 luck n. 好运 ‎8. give sb. a ride 让某搭便车 如：‎ ‎ He often gives me a ride to school. 他经常让我搭便车去学校。‎ ‎9.only just 刚刚好、恰好 ‎ ‎10. go off (闹钟)闹响 The alarm went off just now. 刚才警钟响了。‎ ‎11. break down 坏掉 ‎ ‎12. fool n. 傻子 呆子 v. 愚弄 欺骗 如： He is a fool. 他是一个呆子。 ‎ ‎ We can’t fool our teach. 我们不能欺骗我们的教师。(动词)‎ ‎13. show up 出现 出席 She didn’t show up last night. 昨晚她没有出现 ‎14. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某做事 如：‎ ‎ My friend invited me to watch TV. 我的朋友邀请我看电视。‎ ‎15. set off 激起 出发 set up 建立 ‎16. ①so … that 如此…以致于 引导结果状语从句，so后面接形容词、副词.‎ ‎②so that作“为了”时，引导目的状语从句，从句常出现情态动词，‎ ‎ 作结果状语从句时，从句中一般不用情态动词 。‎ 如：She got up early so that she could catch the bus. ‎ 为了能赶上车，她起得很早。(目的状语从句)‎ ‎ She was so sad that she couldn’t say a word. ‎ 她悲伤得一句话也说不出来。(结果状语从句)‎ ‎17. flee from 从…逃跑 避开 如：They fled from their home. ‎ 他们从他们的家里逃了出来。‎ ‎18. thrill v . 使人非常激动，使人非常紧张 ‎ thrilled adj. 指某人感到激动或感到紧张 ‎ thrilling adj. 指某事物使人心情激动 ‎19. get married 结婚 ‎20. convince v. 使信服 convincing adj. 令人信服的 ‎21. land v. 着落 ‎22. be late for 迟到 ‎23. a piece of 一片/块/张 如： a piece of paper/ bread 一张纸/ 一块面包 重点短语：‎ ‎1.到…时候by the time +…(句子)…从过去某一点到从句所示时间为止的一段时间,即从句用过去时,主句用过去完成时。‎ ‎2.(闹钟)闹响go off ‎3.跑掉;迅速离开run off ‎4.损坏break down (突然)中断break off ‎5.(在)愚人节(on) April Fool's Day ‎ ‎6.激起;引 起set off ‎7.一片,一块a piece of ‎ ‎8.按时on time 及时in time ‎ Section A ‎1.从…离开去…leave (from)…for …‎ ‎ 把某物遗忘在某地leave sth. +介宾短语(表地点的)‎ ‎ 忘记某人/某事forget sb /sth.‎ ‎ 忘记去作…forget to do …‎ ‎ 忘记已作了…forget doing …‎ ‎2.在洗沐浴get in the shower ‎3.开始作…start/begin to do …(前后不同的事)start/begin doing …(前后相同的事)‎ ‎4.我上学从未迟到,但昨天我差点迟到.I 've never been late for school ,but yesterday I came very close.‎ ‎5.等待(某人)作…wait (for sb )to do …‎ ‎6.出来;开花come out 实现come ture 从旁而过come by 来自…come/be from…‎ ‎7.我必须抓紧了.I had to really rush.‎ ‎8.飞快冲了个 澡take/have a quick shower ‎9.给/让某人搭便车give/get sb. a ride =give /get a ride to sb.‎ ‎10.我恰好赶上上课.I only just made it to my class.(此时,指"约定"之意)‎ SectionB ‎1.给某人穿衣服dress sb.‎ ‎ 穿(…)衣服 be /get dressed (in +衣服)‎ ‎ 化装;打扮dress up ‎2.熬夜stay /sit up (late) ‎ ‎3.给某人看某物show sb .sth.=show sth .to sb.‎ ‎ 带某人参观…show sb.around sth.‎ ‎ 卖弄…show off…‎ ‎ 出席,露面show up ‎ 展览 be on show =be on display ‎ ‎4.化妆舞会a costume party ‎5.在地球着陆land on the earth ‎6.由演员奥森·威尔斯主 持的广播节目a radio program by actor Orsom Welles ‎7.遍及全国across the whole country =all over the whole country ‎8.从…逃跑;避开…flee from…=run away from…(flee过去式为fled )‎ ‎9.将有…the re will be ….(一般将来时)‎ ‎ there would be …(过去将来时)‎ ‎10.买尽可能多的意大利面条buy as much spaghetti as they could /possible ‎ ‎11.让某人嫁过某人ask sb .to marry sb.‎ ‎ 结婚get married ‎ ‎ 和…结婚 get /be married with …=marry …‎ ‎12.停止作…stop doing … 停下某事来作…stop to do …‎ ‎13.在开学 第一天on the first day of school ‎14.(向某人)打招呼say hello (to sb.)‎ ‎15.醒来wake up 叫…醒来wake sb. up ‎ ‎16. 有一个很愉快的结局have a very happy ending ‎ ‎17.失去了他的女朋友和他的观众lose both his girlfriend and his show ‎ Unit11‎ ‎1.宾语从句 宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语。‎ ‎ ①由连接词+ 主语+ 谓语　构成 ‎ 　常由下面的一些连接词引导：‎ ‎ ②由that 引导 表示陈述意义 that 可省略 ‎ He says (that) he is at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎ ③由if , whether 引导 表示一般疑问意义(带有是否、已否、对否等)‎ ‎ I don’t know if / whether Wei Hua likes fish. 我不知道韦华是否喜欢鱼。‎ ‎ ④由连接代词、连接副词(疑问词) 引导 表示特殊疑问意义 ‎ Do you know what he wants to buy? 你知道他想要买什么吗？‎ ‎ ⑤从句时态要与主句一致 ‎ 当主句是一般现在时，从句根据情况使用任何时态 ‎ He says (that ) he is at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎ I don’t know (that) she is singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。‎ ‎ She wants to know if I have finished my homework. ‎ 她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。‎ ‎ Do you know when he will be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？‎ 当主句是一般过去时，从句应使用过去某时态 ‎(一般过去时,过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时)‎ ‎ He said (that) he was at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎ I didn’t know that she was singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。‎ She wanted to know if I had finished m homework. ‎ 她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。‎ Did you know when he would be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？‎ ‎2. get v. 得到、买、到达 ‎3. make a telephone call 打电话 ‎ ‎4. save money 省钱、存钱 ‎ ‎5. ①问路常用的句子：‎ ‎ Do you know where …is ?‎ ‎ Can you tell me how can I get to …?‎ Could you tell me how to get to …？‎ ‎②Can/Could/Will/Would you please tell me sth. 表示十分客气地询问事情 ‎　③Could you tell me how to get to the park?‎ 请你告诉我怎么才能去邮局好吗？中的how to get to the park ‎ 是疑问词与动词不定式连用，用作宾语，但不是宾语从句，可是 相当于how I can get to the park（宾语从句）如：‎ I don’t know how to solve the problem. ==‎ ‎ I don’t know how I can solve the problem.我不知道如何解决这个问题 ‎ Can you tell me when to leave? ==‎ ‎ Can you tell me when I ill leave? 你能告诉我什么时候离开？‎ ‎6. 日常交际用语：‎ ‎ take the elevator / escalator to the … floor.乘电梯/自动扶梯到…楼 ‎ turn left / right === take a left / right 向左/ 右转 ‎ go past 经过 go straight 向前直走 ‎7. next to 旁边、紧接着 如：Lily is next to Ann. 莉莉就在安的旁边。‎ ‎8. between … and… 在…和…之间 ‎ 如: Lily is between Ann and Tom. 莉莉就在安和汤姆的之间。‎ ‎9. decide to do 决定做… She decided to go to have lunch. 她决定去吃午餐。‎ ‎ decide v. decision n. make a decision 做个决定 ‎10. Is that a good place to hang out? 那是不是一个闲荡的好地方？‎ ‎ 中的to hang out修饰前面名词place，不定式作定语. ‎ 如：There are something to eat. 这有吃的东西。中的to eat修饰代词something，作定语.‎ ‎11. kind of +adj./ adv. 译为“有点、一点”‎ 如： She is kind of shy. 她有点害羞。‎ ‎12. expensive 贵的 反义词 inexpensive 不贵的 ‎13. crowded 拥挤的 反义词 uncrowded 不拥挤的 ‎14. take a vacation == go on a vacation 去度假 ‎15. dress up 打扮 dress up as 打扮成..‎ ‎ 如：He wanted to dress up as Father Christmas.他想要打扮成圣诞老人。‎ ‎16. on the beach 在海滩上 的介词用 on ‎17. politely adv. 有礼貌地 polite adj. 有礼貌的 ‎18. depend on sth / doing / 从句 根据、依靠、依赖、决定于 ‎ Living things depend on the sunlight.生物对阳光有依赖性。‎ ‎ We can’t depend on his answer. 我们不能根据他的回答。‎ ‎ That depends on how you did it. 那决定于你怎样做这件事。‎ ‎19. prefer动词 更喜欢 宁愿 常用的结构有： ‎ ‎ prefer sth. 更喜欢某事 I prefer English. 我更喜欢英语。‎ ‎ prefer doing/ to do 宁愿做某事 I prefer sitting/ to sit.我宁愿坐着。‎ ‎ prefer sth to sth. 同…相比更喜欢… I prefer dogs to cats. 与猫相比我更喜欢狗。‎ ‎ prefer doing to doing 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事 I prefer walking to sitting. 我宁愿走路也不愿坐着 ‎ prefer to do rather than do 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事 ‎ ‎ I prefer to work rather than be free. 我宁愿工作而不愿闲着。‎ ‎20. on the other hand 另一方面 ‎21.把…借给某人lend sb. sth. ＝ lend sth.to sb. 如：‎ ‎ Lily lent me her book. == Lily lent her book to me .莉莉把她的书借给了我。‎ ‎22. such as ‎23. I’m sorry to do sth. 对做某事我觉得很抱歉、伤心。‎ ‎24. in a way 在某种程度说 ‎25. in order to do 为了做… 表目的 如：‎ ‎ He got up early in order to catch the first bus.‎ ‎ 他起早床，是为了赶上头班公共汽车。‎ ‎26. 等级/同级比较：as…as ， not as/so…as ‎①as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as ‎ 表示“和…一样的…”“…和…一样的…” ‎ ‎ 　如：　He works as hard as we. 他工作和我们同样努力。‎ ‎ ②否定式：not as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as ‎ ‎== not so + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as ‎ He doesn’t work as / so hard as we. 他工作没有我们那样努力。‎ ‎27. hand in 上交 Unit12‎ ‎1. be supposed to do .　应该　如： We are supposed to stop smoking. 我们应该停止吸烟。‎ ‎　知识拓展　表示应该的词有：should, ought to ,be supposed to ‎ ‎2. shake hands　握手　　shake 本意是“摇动、震动”‎ ‎3. You should have asked what you were supposed to wear.‎ 你本应该问清楚怎么样穿才得体。中的“should have asked”是 ‎“情态动词＋现在完成时”表示过去本应该做某事，事实上没有做 如：She should have gone to Beijing. 她本应该去了北京。（没有去）‎ ‎4. be relaxed about sth.　对某事随意、不严格　如：‎ ‎　　They are relaxed about the time. 他们对时间很随意。‎ ‎5. pretty 　adv. 相当,很＝very　She is pretty friendly. 她相当友好。‎ ‎ adj. 美丽的 She is a pretty girl.她是一个美丽的女孩。‎ ‎6. make plans to do == plan to do. 打算做某事　如：‎ ‎　She has made plans to go to Beijing.==She has planed to go to Beijing.‎ ‎7. drop by 访问　看望　拜访　串门 ‎　We just dropped by our friends’ homes.我们刚刚去朋友家串门。‎ ‎8. on time 按时 ‎9.　after all 毕竟　终究　如：You see I was right after all.你看，毕竟还是我对了。‎ ‎10. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某事　如：‎ ‎　Lily invited me to have dinner.莉莉请我吃晚饭。‎ ‎11. without 没有 ‎12. around the world == all over the world 全世界 ‎13. pick up 捡起　挑选　如：He picked up his hat. 他捡起他的帽子。‎ ‎14. start doing == start to do 开始做某事　如 ‎　　He started reading.== He started to read. 他开始读。‎ ‎15. point at 指向　‎ ‎16. stick v. 剌　截　　n. 棒，棍　‎ ‎ chopstick 筷子　是由chop(砍)＋stick(棒)合成，通常用复数形式：chopsticks ‎17. go out of one’s way to do 特意，专门做某事　如：‎ ‎　　He went out of his way to make me happy. 他特意使我高兴。‎ ‎18. make mistakes 犯错误（复数）make a mistake 犯错误（一个）‎ ‎19. be different from 与…不同　　如：‎ ‎　　　Chinese food is different from theirs. 中国菜与他们的不同.‎ 20. get/be used to sth. 习惯于…‎ get/be used to doing　习惯于…‎ ‎ be used to do 　　被用于做…‎ ‎ be used for doing　被用于做…‎ ‎ used to do 过去常常做…　如： ‎ I wash clothes everyday. But I’m used to it.我每天都洗衣服，但我习惯了 I am used to washing clothes. 我习惯于洗衣服了。‎ ‎ The knives are used to cut things. 小刀被用来切东西。‎ ‎ The knives are used for cutting things. 小刀被用来切东西。‎ ‎　 She used to watch TV after school. 她过去放学后常常看电视。‎ ‎21. 我发现要记住每一样事是困难的。‎ I find it difficult to remember everything.‎ ‎ 形式宾语　　 真正宾语 常见的形式宾语有：find / think + it/them +形容词 to do sth. 如：‎ ‎　 I think it hard to study English.‎ ‎22. cut up 切开　切碎　如：Let’s cut up the water melon. 让我们切开这个西瓜吧。‎ ‎23. make a toast 敬酒 ‎24. crowd v.挤满 其形容词和过去式及过去分词都是：crowded ‎25. set n. 一套　　v. 设置 ‎26. can’t stop doing 忍不住做某事　I can’t stop laughing. 我忍不住笑 ‎27. make faces　做鬼脸　　‎ ‎28.　face to face 面对面 ‎29. learn…by oneself 自学　如：　　　I learn English by my self. 我自学英语。‎ Unit 13---Unit15 疑难点 一、疑点难点破解 ‎　　1. You have to be careful.你得小心。 疑点：be careful“小心，当心”‎ ‎　　如：Be careful while crossing the road.过马路要小心。‎ ‎　　难点：be careful后常跟of短语。与它同义的有look out。‎ 如：Aren’t you a bit too careful of your health？你对个人的健康难道不是有点过于小心了吗？‎ Look out！There’s danger ahead.当心！前面有危险。‎ ‎2. At times an ad can lead you to buy something you don’t need at all.有时广告可能导致你买你根本不需要的东西。‎ 疑点：at times= sometime，是副词性短语，表示事物发生的频率。‎ 如：He is late for school at times.他有时上学迟到。 ‎ 难点：1)对含有at times的短语进行提问时，用How soon.‎ 如：How soon does he go to school late？At times.‎ ‎2)句中lead意为“使得、导致”，常用于短语lead sb. to do sth.“导致某人做某事”‎ 如：What leads you to think so？‎ ‎　　3.Soft lighting makes people look good，but it make food look bad.柔和的光线使人的脸色看上去很好看，但使食物看起来很难看。‎ ‎　　疑点：look good/bad意思为“外表的颜色看起来好看/难看”‎ ‎　　如：The traffic accident made him look bad.‎ ‎　　难点：look fine/ well指看起来身体健康 ‎　　如：You look better today than yesterday.你今天看上去比昨天好多了。‎ ‎　3. It makes me want to join a clean-up campaign.这让我想加入一次清扫大运动。‎ ‎　　疑点：注意join的用法：(1)join加入军队，政党，组织等，成为其中一员。‎ ‎　　如：The next year he joined the union.第二年他加入了工会。‎ ‎　　(2)join加入某人，并一起进行某项活动。‎ ‎　　如：She joined her husband in his study.她与她的丈夫一块从事他的研究。‎ ‎　　难点：与join意思相近的短语take part in也表示“参加……”，take an active part in积极参加。它侧重于参加某项活动或运动。‎ ‎　　如：Do you take an active part in sports？你积极参加体育活动吗？‎ ‎　　4. For instance，they can help you to compare two different products so that you can buy the one you really need.‎ ‎　例如，他们能够帮你比较两种不同的产品，以至于你能买到你真正需要的那个。‎ ‎　　疑点：for instance相当于for example 意思为“例如”‎ ‎　　如：He likes all kinds of sports， for instance he likes playing soccer very much.‎ ‎　　难点：句中的compare意为“比较，对照”，可以构成短语compare...with...把……与……相比，compare...to...把……比作……‎ If we compare French schools with British schools，we will find many differences. ‎ ‎　　如果我们把法国的学校与英国的学校相比，会发现许多不同之处。‎ ‎　　如：The poet compares the woman he loves to a rose.‎ ‎　　这位诗人把他所钟情的女人比作玫瑰花。‎ ‎　　5. If you think flowers are too feminine a gift for a man to receive，you can consider giving a plant instead.‎ 如果你认为鲜花对一位男士来说太女性化而不好接受，你可以考虑送一种植物。‎ ‎　　疑点：consider doing sth. 考虑做某事 如：I’m considering changing my job.我正在考虑换工作。‎ 难点：consider还可以加that从句，表示“考虑到…”；还可以组成短语consider sb. +n/adj， 表示“把…看作/认为…” ‎ ‎　　如：If you consider that she’s only been studying English for six months，she speaks it well. 如果考虑到她学英语才六个月，那么她讲英语讲得的确不错了。‎ ‎　　Do you consider her suitable for the job？你认为她做这工作合适吗？‎ 二、重点讲解 ‎　　1. Rainy days make me sad.雨天使人沮丧。 make的用法 ‎　　(1)make+n.make food 做饭make a plane做飞机make the bed 铺床 make money 赚钱 make sb./sth.+adj.使某人(感到)，使……处于某种状态 ‎　　(2)make的宾语之后可跟名词、形容词、分词来充当宾语的补足语 ‎　　1)名词作make的宾语补足语 ‎　　The party made her a good teacher.党把她培养成为一名好教师.‎ ‎　　2)形容词作make的宾语补足语 ‎　　如：Soccer makes me crazy.足球使我疯狂。‎ ‎　　The soft music makes Tina sleepy.轻柔的音乐使Tina快睡着了。‎ ‎　　Waiting for her made me angry.我很生气一直等着她。‎ ‎　　可用到的形容词有：happy，pleased，surprised，angry，annoyed，sad，upset，unhappy，worried，anxious，excited，relaxed，stressed out，tense，calm，scared，comfortable，sick…‎ ‎　　3)分词作make的宾语补足语 ‎　　如： I made myself understood by all the students.‎ ‎　　You must make yourself respected.‎ ‎　　(3). make sb./sth.+do…使某人做某事(不能带不定式符号to)‎ ‎　　如：Wars make the peace go away.战争使和平远离。‎ ‎　　注意：当make用于被动语态时，必须带不定式符号to.‎ ‎　　如：We were made to work all night.我们被迫日夜工作。‎ ‎　　(4). make it习惯用语，及时赶到，到达目的地 ‎　　如：I just made it to my class.(Unit 9)我恰好赶到班级。(arrived in time)‎ ‎　　(5). make of /from./out of ‎　　make of 原材料制成成品后，原材料未经任何化学变化，仍保持原有性质.‎ ‎　　如：The chair is made of wood.‎ ‎　　make from当原材料制成成品后，经过了化学变化，失去了原有性质.‎ ‎(6). make up of 常用于被动结构：be made up of…相当于consist of…(由……组成)‎ ‎　　make up from 由…..所制造 ‎　　如：A car is made up of many different parts.‎ ‎　　She wore a necklace made up from gold coins.她戴着一串由金币制成的项链.‎ ‎　　2.…but don’t really tell you anything about the quality of the product.但没有真正告诉你有关产品质量的任何问题。‎ ‎　　tell sb. about sth.“告诉某人有关某事”，tell sb. sth.“告诉某人某事”。‎ ‎　　如：The granny told us about a thief breaking into her house.‎ ‎　　Tell me where you live.告诉我你住在哪儿。？‎ ‎　　3. They also have to know how to make money.他们还必须知道如何赚钱。‎ ‎　　(1)know how to do 其中的不定式带有疑问词。‎ ‎　　know what to do 知道做什么。这一句式可以改为复合句，上句也可为：‎ ‎　　They also have to know how they can make money.‎ ‎　　又如：Please tell me when we should leave. =Please tell me when to leave.‎ ‎　　请告诉我什么时候离开。‎ ‎　　(2)make money/earn money挣钱 ‎ ‎　　如：His father makes /earns a lot of money as a pilot.他父亲当飞机驾驶员挣钱很多。‎ ‎　　4. However，some advertising can be confusing or misleading.‎ ‎　　然而，一些广告会混淆或误导你。‎ ‎　　(1)confuse v.使迷惑；confusing adj令人迷惑的；confusedadj.迷惑的，糊涂的 ‎　　如：Waking up in strange surroundings confused her.她醒来时看到一片陌生的环境，这把她搞糊涂了。‎ ‎　　The instructions are very confusing and I can’t understand them.这些指示莫名其妙，我没有办法理解 ‎　　He gets confused easily.他很容易被弄糊涂。‎ ‎　　(2)mislead v.使某人想错/做错，误导；misleading adj.令人受误导的 ‎　　如：a misleading description/advertisement误导人的描述(广告)‎ ‎　　5. Be sure to follow your host’s suggestions.务必要遵从主人的暗示或提议。‎ ‎　　(1)be sure to别忘了，记住 ‎　　如：Be sure to turn everything off before you go to bed.别忘了睡觉之前关上各样东西。‎ ‎　　(2)be sure to do一定会……的，必定会发生的。‎ ‎　　如：It’s sure to rain. 必定会下雨。‎ ‎　　(3)be sure of 对……有把握。‎ ‎　　如：He’s sure of living to ninety.他对活到90岁很有信心。‎ 三、语法展示 ‎　　宾语补足语 ‎　　1.宾语补足语和宾语一起称为复合宾语，可作宾语补足语的有：名词，代词，形容词，副词，分词，不定式，介词短语，名词从句。‎ ‎　　如：(1)We call him Jim.我们叫他吉姆。‎ ‎　　(2)Whom do you think of me？ 你以为我是谁？‎ ‎　　(3)Please keep the room clean.请保持室内清洁。‎ ‎　　(4)He found her out.他发现她出去了。‎ ‎　　(5)She found the book interesting.她认为这本书很有意思。‎ ‎　　(6)You’d better have your shoes mended.你还是请人把鞋补一补吧。‎ ‎　　(7)Make yourselves at home.不要受拘束。‎ ‎　　(8)We made him what he is.是我们使他成为现在这样。‎ ‎　　2.宾语补足语的注意事项 ‎　　1)作宾语补足语的形容词应放在宾语后，若放在前则变成了定语。‎ ‎　　如：(1)We found the man honest.我们发现此人很诚实。(宾补)‎ ‎　　(2)We found the honest man.我们发现了这个诚实的人。(定语)‎ ‎　　2)在动词elect，choose，make之后用作补语的名词，若是表示“身份，职位”则不带冠词。如：They elected Li Lei monitor last week.上周他们选李雷当班长。‎ ‎　　3)有些动词后通常跟“to be+名词或形容词短语”作补语，但to be常省去。这些动词有：think，consider，believe，imagine，suppose，see，find，feel，etc.。‎ ‎　　如：He thinks himself (to be) a clever man. 他认为自己很聪明。‎ ‎　　4)复合宾语可变为宾语从句。‎ ‎　　如：We think her a nice woman.→We think that she is a nice woman.我们认为她是个很好的人。‎ ‎　　5)动词let，make，have及感官动词后用不带to的不定式作补语，若变为被动语态，应将to加上。‎ ‎　　如：I saw tears come into her eyes.→Tears were seen to come into her eyes.我看到她眼里含着泪。‎ ‎　　6)感官动词后跟不带to的不定式或现在分词作补语，其区别在于不定式强调事实经过或动作已完成，而现在分词则强调当时情景或动作正在进行。请比较。‎ ‎　　如：I like to hear her sing.我喜欢听她唱歌。‎ ‎　　I heard her singing last night.昨晚我听到她在唱歌。‎ 一、疑点难点破解 ‎　　1. Have you turned off your radio？你关掉收音机了吗？‎ ‎　　疑点：turn off表示“切断、关上”之意，用于指切断电源、关上水管等。它的反义词是turn on。当关掉的东西是代词时，把代词放在中间。‎ ‎　　如：His mother told him to turn off TV and do his homework.他母亲叫他关掉电视去做作业。‎ ‎　　The tap is broken.If you want to save water，you must turn it off.‎ ‎　　难点：与此相关的短语还有turn up“开大声”，turn down“关小点声”。用法同turn off/on.‎ ‎　　如：It is too noisy. Please turn your radio down.‎ ‎　　I can’t hear clearly. Would you please turn the tape up？‎ ‎　　2.In the past twelve months they’ve had three major concerts and made a hit CD.在过去的12个月里他们举行了3次大型演唱会，出了一盘火暴的CD。‎ ‎　　疑点：for/in the past/last twelve months/years/days/etc.常与现在完成时态连用。‎ ‎　　如：(1)For the past few days he has been ill.几天来他一直生病。‎ ‎　　(2)She has been ill for the last three days.这三个星期他在生病。‎ ‎　　(3)In the past three years we have learned two thousand English words.‎ ‎　　3年来我们学了2000个英语单词。‎ ‎　　难点：用于肯定句时，和以上短语连用的动词必须是延续性动作。‎ ‎　如：He has had(而不是bought)the book for three years.他已经买这本书三年了。‎ You have kept(不用borrow) the book for two weeks.你已经借这本书两个星期了。 ‎ ‎　　3. This program started in 1980 and so far has brought thousands of overseas Chinese students to China to look for their families’roots.这个项目是1980年开始的，到目前为止已经帮助了几千名海外中国学生来中国寻根。‎ ‎　　疑点：so far意为“到目前为止”，相当于till now/up to now，可用于句首或句末，用作状语，表示范围、程度或距离，通常作为现在完成时的时间状语出现。‎ ‎　　如：I have read many foreign stories so far.‎ ‎　　难点：so far as 意为“就…而论”、“到…程度”，表示程度、距离等。‎ ‎　　如：So far as I know，he has been to Beijing many times.据我所知，他已去过北京许多次了。‎ ‎4. I agree with you. 我同意你的看法。‎ 疑点：agree with sb./sb.’s idea/ sb.’s view同意某人，同意某人的观点、想法、主意。‎ ‎　　如：My mother doesn’t agree with my father and me.我妈妈不同意我和爸爸的想法。‎ ‎　　难点：agree还有许多的用法 ‎　　(1)用于简短回答中“同意”或“赞成”。如：Chocolate is good for your health. Do you agree？‎ ‎　　Yes，I agree./No，I don’t agree. ‎ ‎　　(2)agree to do sth同意去做某事。如：I agree to ask someone for help.我同意向别人求助。‎ ‎　　(3)agree to sth赞成某个建议、安排等。如：He agreed to your suggestion.他赞成你的建议。‎ ‎　　(4)agree on sth. 在……方面达成一致。如：We agree on a price for the car.我们就车价达成一致意见。‎ ‎　　(5)agree that+从句。如：Tom’s mother agree that he went on with his study.‎ ‎　　5.You have probably never heard of Amy Winterbourne.你大概从未听说过Amy Winterbourne.‎ ‎　　疑点：hear of/about听说，接名词、代词或动名词。如：I have never heard of the story before.‎ ‎　　难点：1)hear表示听说时，后面接宾语从句。‎ ‎　　如：I heard that his father died yesterday.‎ ‎　　2)hear from=get/receive a letter from意为“收到…的信”，“得到…的消息”from后面加表示人的名词或代词 ‎　　如：How often do you hear from your father？你每隔多久收到你父亲的来信？‎ ‎　　6. The walls are made from old glass bottles that are glued together.墙是由胶合在一起的旧玻璃瓶做成的。‎ ‎　　疑点：be made from 意思是“由… 制成”，但制成品不能看出原材料。‎ ‎　　如：Paper is made from wood.纸是由木头制成的。‎ ‎　　难点：be made还可以构成其他词组，注意区分。‎ ‎(1)be made of意为“由…原材料制成”，主语为制成品，而且能看出原材料，of后面接表示原材料的名词。如：This jacket is made of cotton.这件上衣是棉花做的。‎ ‎　　(2)be made in表示某一产品在某地生产或制造，in后面跟表示地点的名词。‎ ‎　　如：Trains are made in Zhuzhou.火车是株洲制造的。‎ ‎　　(3)be made by意为“由(谁)制造的”，by后面接动作的执行者。如：The desk was made by his brother.这张桌子是他弟弟做的。‎ 二、重点讲解 ‎　　1. Have you packed yet？你打包了吗？‎ ‎　　(1)这是一个现在完成时的句型，它是在两个时间上，一是过去，一是现在。它的动作发生在过去，但对现在有影响或结果，而这种影响和结果是说话人的兴趣所在，所以常常后面不用时间状语。Have/has+动词的过去分词，是它的基本结构。‎ ‎　　如：Someone has broken the door.有人把门打破了。(结果，门仍破着)‎ ‎　　(2)pack包装，把……装箱pack sth(up)into…整理行装 ‎　　如：Pack clothes into a truck.把衣服装进衣箱内。‎ ‎　　pack into塞进，挤进。如：The children packed into the cinemas on a wet day.在雨天，孩子们挤进电影院。‎ ‎　　2. I have not cleaned out the refrigerator yet.我还没把冰箱清除干净。‎ ‎　　clean sth out打扫某物之内部，扫除某物的尘土等。如：It is time for you to clean your bedroom.现在该你打扫你的卧室的时候了。‎ ‎　　clean sth up清除罪犯和不道德分子，整顿(某物)。‎ ‎　　如：The mayor has decided to clean up the city.市长已决定要整顿市政。 ‎ ‎　　clean sth down清扫，擦干净。如：Clean down the walls.把墙上的尘土扫下。‎ ‎　　3. I have not done any of these things yet Because my grandfather came to chat to me.那些事情我一样也还没做，因为我祖父来和我聊天。‎ ‎　　(1)because连词，因为。如：I did it because they asked me to do it.我做这事是因为他们要我做。‎ ‎　　(2)because所表达的原因是不知道的，如要表达明显的理由，或被认为是知道的，就用as，for，或so。如：As it is raining，you had better take a taxi.=It is raining，so you had better take a taxi.既然下雨，你最好坐出租车来。‎ ‎　　(3)because of 后面加名词或名词短语。‎ ‎　　如：Because of his bad legs，he could not walk so fast as the others.因为他的腿有毛病，他不能和别人一样走得快。‎ ‎　　4.Be sure not to miss them if they come to a city near you-if you can get tickets.如果他们到了一个离你近的城市，务必不要错过，如果你能得到票的话。‎ ‎　　be sure to do务必，一定要。如：Be sure to tell me when you arrive home.到家后务必要告诉我一声。‎ ‎　　★注意动词不定式to do的否定形式，要直接在to do前加not。如：Be sure not to wake up the sleeping boy.一定不要吵醒在睡觉的孩子。‎ ‎　　5. I feel like I have done something that wasn’t important to me before.我想我做了些原先对我并不重要的一些事情。‎ ‎　　feel like+ doing sth.想要，欲要。如：I don’t feel like eating a big meal now.我现在不想吃大餐。‎ ‎　　6. They provide homes for many endangered animals，and help to educate the public about caring for them.我们为濒危动物们提供住所，并教育公众照顾他们。‎ ‎　　provide sth for sb /provide sb with sth把某物提供给某人。如：These letters should provide us with all the information we need.这些信应该为我们提供所需的全部信息。‎ 三、语法展示 ‎　　(一)特殊副词的用法 ‎　　现在完成时态我们在前面的一、二个单元中已讲述过，所以本单元只讲现在完成时态与几个副词的关系。‎ ‎　　1. ever， never ‎　　ever“曾经”，表示从过去到目前为止的时间，用于现在完成时态的疑问和含有最高级的从句中，否定句中常用never代替ever，在反意疑问句中，附加问句用肯定。‎ ‎　　如：(1)Have you ever been to Hefei？你曾去过合肥吗？‎ ‎　　(2)This is the most interesting film that I have ever seen.这是我曾看过的电影中最有趣的一部。‎ ‎　　(3)He has never been to the Great Wall，has he？他从未去过长城，是吗？‎ ‎　　2. still，just ‎　　still“仍然，还”，强调过去开始的情况或动作仍在继续，指时间，强调延续；just“刚刚，刚才”，多与现在完成时连用。注意要与just now区别开，just now指过去的时间，常与过去时连用。‎ ‎　　如：(1)Has your sister still lived here？你妹妹仍然住在这儿吗？‎ ‎　　(2)I have just finished lunch.我刚吃过中饭。‎ ‎　　(3)I saw her mother just now.我刚才看见了她母亲。‎ ‎　　3. before，ago ‎　　两者都可作副词用，before表示过去时间的以前，可独立使用，泛指“以前”，可用于现在完成时态或一般过去时态。ago不能独立使用，要置于时间段的词组之后，只能用于过去时态，表示从现在算起以前的时间。但可以用在情态动词加完成时态结构中，表示现在对过去发生的事情的推测。此外与since连用，构成since…ago用于现在完成时态。‎ ‎　　如：(1)She has seen the film before. 她以前看过这部电影。‎ ‎　　(2)Mary saw Jim a week ago.玛丽一周前见过吉姆。‎ ‎　　(3)A lot of new things have happened since ten years ago.自十年前以来发生了很多新鲜事。‎ ‎　　4. since，for ‎　　since：“自从”，表示的是一个时间点，可用作介词，也可作连词。用作介词时，后接指时间点的名词或短语；用作连词时，后跟一个时间状语从句，但其前的谓语动词或主句的谓语动词须用现在完成时。for构成的短语在现在完成时里，表示时间的长度，后须跟“一段时间”，不可跟“时间点”。‎ ‎　　如：(1)He has worked at that factory since he came to the city.他到这城市以来一直在这家工厂工作。‎ ‎　　(2)I have studied English for three years. 我学习英语已有三年了。‎ ‎　　(二)have been to 与have gone to 的区别 ‎　　(1)have been to表示“已经去过某地”，现在已经不在所去的地方了 ‎　　如：He has been to America twice.他已经去过美国两次了。‎ ‎　　(2)have gone to表示“去了某地”，并未回来，最起码不在当地。‎ ‎　　He is not here. He has gone to America.他不在这里，他去美国了。‎ ‎ Unit 13---Unit15单元重难点句子讲解 ‎1. I’d rather go to the Blue Lagoon Restaurant... 我宁愿去Blue Lagoon餐厅，……‎ would rather意为“宁愿……”，表示句子主语的愿望、选择，后接省去to的不定式。‎ He’d rather join you in the English Group. 他宁愿加入到你的英语小组中来。‎ Which would you rather have, bread or rice? 面包和米饭，你更喜欢哪一个？‎ 如果表示“宁愿（可）……也不愿……”则用句型would rather...than...。在would rather和than后面所连接的两个对比部分一般要一致。‎ The brave soldier would rather die than give in.那个勇敢的士兵宁死不屈。‎ He’d rather work than play. 他宁愿工作也不愿玩。‎ They preferred to die of hunger rather than take his bread.‎ 他们宁愿饿死也不愿接受他的面包。‎ ‎2. Loud music makes me happy. (P103)嘈杂的音乐使我很开心。‎ Loud music always makes me want to dance. (P103)嘈杂的音乐总是使我想去跳舞。‎ 这两句是动词make的使役用法，make me后分别接了形容词和不定式短语。make的这种用法常见于以下结构：‎ ‎◎ make+名词（代词）+省略to的动词不定式 My parents often make me do some other homework. 我父母常让我做些其他的作业。‎ 特别提示 这一结构中的不定式短语在主动结构中是宾语补足语，必须省去to，变为被动结构时，不定式短语作主语补足语，这时必须带to。‎ She was made to work for the night shift. 她不得不上夜班。‎ ‎◎make+名词/代词+-ed分词短语 What made them so frightened?什么使他们这样害怕？‎ Can you make yourself understood in English?你能用英语把意思表达清楚吗？‎ ‎◎make+名词/代词+介词短语或名词短语 She made him her assistant. 她委派他做自己的助手。‎ Sit down and make yourselves at home, everyone.大家请坐，不要拘束。‎ ‎◎make+名词（代词）+形容词或形容词短语。‎ The good news made us happy. 这条好消息使我们很高兴。‎ ‎3. ... small restaurants can serve many people every day. (P104)……小饭店每天就可以多接待些顾客。‎ 句中的serve 有“服侍，侍候，招待”等意思，常用于以下结构中：‎ ‎◎ serve+宾语 They were busy serving the day’s last buyers.他们正忙着接待这天的最后一批顾客。‎ Nobody can serve two masters. 一人不能侍奉二主。‎ ‎◎ serve sb sth, 或serve sth to sb Mrs Turner served us a very good dinner.‎ ‎=Mrs Turner served a very good dinner to us.‎ 特纳太太招待我们吃了一顿丰盛的晚餐。‎ ‎ ◎ serve sb with sth We served them with beer and wine. 我们用啤酒和红酒招待他们。‎ ‎4. However, some advertising can be confusing or misleading. (P106)可是，一些广告可能会混淆黑白或误导消费。‎ confusing与misleading是两个现在分词，相当于形容词，意思分别是“感到混消的”和“误导的”，在句中作表语，主语通常是表示物的名词或代词，如本句中的用法；也可以用作定语，既可修饰表示人的名词或代词，也可以修饰表示物的名词或代词。‎ They can be some confusing or misleading advertisements.‎ 它们可能是一些混淆黑白或误导消费的广告。‎ What he said made us confusing.他说的话令我们感到困惑。‎ ‎5. At times an ad can lead you to buy something you don’t need at all.(P106) 有时，一则广告会诱导你去买你根本就不需要的东西。‎ at times意为“有时，不时”，与sometimes同义。两者在句中的位置较灵活，可位于句首，句中或句末。‎ At times I make mistakes when I speak English. 我说英语时有时会出错。‎ They went to town at times during the cold winter.在寒冷的冬天，他们有时候进城去。‎ Sometimes they walk to school. 有时候，他们步行上学。‎ He sometimes plays football with his friends. 他有时和朋友一起踢足球。‎ ‎6. To start with, it was raining, and rainy days make me sad. (P107)起初，天在下雨，雨天使我心情很不好。‎ ‎◎ start with作“首先”解时，只用于动词不定式，在句中常常以插入语的形式出现。‎ To start with, the computer room must be kept very clean.‎ 首先，计算机工作室必须保持清洁。‎ Our group had five members, to start with.刚开始，我们小组只有五个人。‎ ‎◎ start with可表示“从……开始”；“先从某事做起”，与begin...with是同义词组。反义词组是end with“以……结束”。‎ He started/began with the aim of injuring others only to end up by ruining himself.他本想损害别人，结果只害了自己。‎ The meeting ended with a speech given by the chairman.会议以主席的讲话结束。‎ He wanted to start/begin with the smallest country and end with the largest one.‎ 他打算先去最小的国家，最后去最大的国家。‎ ‎◎ start单独使用时，意为“开始”，可用作及物动词或不及物动词。用作及物动词时，其后跟名词、代词，也可跟动词不定式或动名词形式。begin是start的同义词，两者在用法上没有很大差别，只是start侧重动作的突然开始。‎ As soon as we got there, it started raining.我们一到那儿就下雨了。‎ When did we start/begin this lesson?我们是什么时候开始讲这一课的？‎ ‎7. ...some people would rather just give money.(P108)……有些宁愿只给钱。‎ 句中的would rather是would rather...than...的省略形式，意为“宁愿……而不……”，表示主观愿望。使用这一结构，要注意两个比较的部分对等。‎ You would also rather stay at home and read a good book than go to a party.‎ 你宁愿待在家里看一本好书也不愿去参加舞会。‎ I would rather have the small one than the big one.我宁愿要小的，不要大的。‎ 特别提示：‎ 比较的部分如果是动词，than后应是动词原形。‎ ‎8. I prefer to receive a gift... (P108)我宁愿接受一件……礼物。‎ prefer表示选择时，可用两种句型。‎ ‎（1）prefer+名词或动名词+to+名词或动名词。‎ They prefer red to blue.与蓝色相比，他们更喜欢红色。‎ I preferred doing something to doing nothing.我喜欢做点什么，而不喜欢闲着。‎ ‎（2）prefer+不定式或名词+rather than+不带to的动词不定式。‎ He preferred to walk there rather than go by bus.‎ 他喜欢走着去那儿，不喜欢乘公共汽车。‎ She prefers to read rather than sit idle.她喜欢读书而不愿闲坐着。‎ Unit 14 ‎ ‎1. Sorry I couldn’t get back to you sooner. (P112)很抱歉我没能尽快给你回复。‎ 这是在E-mail message回复中的常用语,句中“get back to sb”的意思是“以后再答复”。‎ I can’t give you a definite answer now but I’ll get back to you about it soon.‎ 我现在不能给你一个明确的回答，但我很快会给你答复的。‎ ‎2. In the past twelve months, they’ve had three major concerts and made a hit CD. 在过去的十二个月里，他们举办了三场较大的音乐会，出版了一张很受欢迎的CD唱片。‎ ‎（1）“in the past+时间段”常用于完成时的句子中，表示“在过去的……时间里”，past是形容词，可以用last来替换，而past/last的后面通常要使用“数字+名词”的结构。‎ In the past/last two years, she has studied English very hard.‎ 在过去的两年里，她一直在努力地学英语。‎ ‎（2）短语make a hit表示“大获成功”、“（演出等）大受欢迎；受到赞扬”等，hit是名词，表示成功而风行一时的事物，如电影，歌曲，演出等。‎ Zhou Jielun has just made a hit CD. 周杰伦刚出版了一盘轰动一时的CD。‎ His song was a great hit. 他的歌曲轰动一时。‎ He made a great hit in teaching. 他曾在教学上获得了巨大的成功。‎ ‎3. And then they’re going to go on a world tour in which they will perform in ten different cities. (P114)然后，他们将去世界各地旅行并在十个城市巡回演出。‎ ‎...in which they will perform in ten different cities是定语从句，先行词是tour,在关系代词which前介词in通常的位置是在动词perform的后面。本句为了避免与in two different cities短语中的in重复，将perform后的第一个in前置。句中perform 主要指扮演角色，演奏某种乐器，演出某一节目，侧重能力，技巧，效果，可用 作及物动词和不及物动词。‎ The magician performed wonderful tricks. 魔术师表演了精彩的魔术。‎ He performs perfectly on the piano. 他的钢琴演奏太棒了。‎ ‎4. Be sure not to miss them if they come to a city near you — if you can get tickets, that is. (P114)如果他们来到你附近的城市，千万不要错过——当然，如果你能弄到票的话。‎ ‎（1）句中的that is表示“确切地；换句话说；也就是”，用来表达一个准确的说法，即对前面的内容加以准确地说明。‎ She’s a housewife — when she’s not teaching English, that is.‎ 她是个家庭主妇——是指她不教英语的时候。‎ ‎（2）句中miss是“错过”，后接名词、代词或v-ing形式，不可接不定式。‎ They missed the train by two minutes.他们差两分钟没赶上火车。‎ I came late and missed seeing the beginning of the movie.‎ 我来晚了，没有看见电影的开始部分。‎ miss还可表示“丢失”、“失去”，与lose同义。‎ ‎5. ...but we really hope to have a number one hit some day. (P114)……但是我们真的希望有朝一日我们制作出能卖得最好的一首歌。‎ some day意为“将来某一日”，等于someday,与one day是近义词。some day/someday只表示将来，不表示过去。而one day用在过去时的句子里是“有一天”的意思，用在将来时的句子里是“将有一天”，与some day/someday可互换。‎ He will be a scientist some day.总有一天他会成为科学家。‎ I hope to see you one day/someday.我希望有一天会看到你。‎ One day last summer they made a trip to the country.‎ 去年夏天某日他们到乡间旅行。‎ 试译：你一定要有一天来看我。‎ You must come one day to see me.‎ You must come some day to see me.‎ You must come to see me someday.‎ 他有一天来看了我。‎ 误：He came some day to see me.‎ 正：He came one day to see me.‎ ‎6. ...as a part of the “In Search of Roots” summer camp program. (P116)……作为“寻根”夏令营活动的一部分。‎ in search for是固定短语,for 后面的名词同样必须是“寻找的目标”，不是“搜寻的对象”。search前常出现a 或one’s等词对search加以限定或修饰，这个短语也常作目的状语。‎ The soldiers were sent in a search for the missing aircraft. ‎ 士兵们被派去搜寻失踪的飞机。‎ So far, they have been unlucky in their search for gold and have no money at all.‎ 到现在为止，他们寻找金子的运气一直不好，而且他们身上也没钱了。‎ 知识拓展 search的基本用法 ‎（1）search的动词用法。‎ ‎◎ search不与介词或副词搭配时是及物动词，表示“搜查”的意思，其后通常接处所或人物名词，表示搜查的对象。‎ He even searched my home without any reason.‎ 他甚至毫无理由地搜查了我的家。‎ I’ve searched my memory, but can’t remember that man’s name.‎ 我苦思良久，仍然记不起那人的名字。‎ They searched every part of the building. 他们对全楼进行了搜查。‎ ‎◎ search用不及物动词，后面接介词for 和after，构成及物性动词短语，两者是“搜寻，寻找”的意思，表示花费极大的气力去搜寻某个特定的目标，常含有对立或不对立的意味，两者可以通用，只不过search for 更常见些。‎ For a whole day they searched for/after the lost child.‎ 他们找了一天这个丢失的孩子。‎ ‎7. ...and so far has brought thousands of overseas Chinese students... (P116) ……到目前为止，它带来了成千上万的海外华裔学生……‎ so far 意思是“到目前为止”‎ ‎，常用于完成时，表示动作从过去开始一直延续到现在，强调到目前为止的情况,可位于句首，也可位于句末。‎ So far, no man has traveled farther than the moon.‎ 到现在为止，还没有人到过比月球更远的地方。‎ How many travelers have been to Disneyland so far?‎ 到现在为止有多少旅客到过迪斯尼乐园？‎ So far we haven’t got any news from them.‎ 到目前为止，我们还没有得到他们的任何消息。‎ ‎8. Most, like Robert, can hardly speak any Chinese, and have never been to China before. (P116) 像罗伯特一样，大多数人几乎都不会说中文，而且以前从来没有到过中国。‎ ‎（1）hardly是一个否定副词，表示“几乎不，简直不”，相当于almost not，含有否定的意义，故在句中不能另加否定词。切莫将hardly误认为是由hard+ly构成的副词。此外，hardly 位于句首时，要用倒装语序。‎ I hardly know what to say. 我简直不知道说什么好。‎ Hardly can I move this heavy desk. 我简直移不动这张重桌子。‎ ‎— Can you catch what I said?你能听懂我说的话吗？‎ ‎— Sorry, I can hardly understand it.对不起，我几乎听不懂。‎ ‎（2）have been后面接to表示某人“去过某地，现在已经回来了”，可用于各种人称。‎ Have you ever been to Shanghai? 你曾经去过上海吗？‎ He has been to America twice. 他到美国去过两次。‎ have gone to与have been in的用法 have gone 表示某人“去某地了”，不论是在途中还是到了目的地，重点是强调这个人已经不在说话人所在的地方了，常用于第三人称；have been in，则表示一直“呆在某个地方”，常与表示一段时间状语连用。‎ Henry has gone to London. 亨利到伦敦去了。‎ They have been in Beijing for two weeks. ‎ 他们在北京已经有两个星期了。‎ ‎10. Thanks to In Search of Roots... (P116)多亏“寻根”……‎ ‎【知识归纳】thanks, thanks to与thanks for的用法 ‎◎ thanks是名词thank的复数形式，意为“感谢”。表示“感谢”之意，可以说：‎ Thanks a lot.‎ Many thanks.‎ A thousand thanks.‎ ‎◎ thanks to是介词词组，后面可以接名词或代词，意为“多亏”；“由于”，在句中作原因状语。‎ Thanks to the old man, we found the lost child at last.‎ 多亏那个老人，我们最后找到了失踪的孩子。‎ ‎◎ thanks for用于对别人已做的事表示感谢，后接名词，代词，或v-ing形式。‎ Thanks for sending me such a nice present.谢谢你寄来这么好的礼品。‎ A thousand thanks for your help.非常感谢你的帮助。‎ Unit 15 ‎ ‎1. In 1972, it was discovered that they are endangered.(P119) 1972年，人们发现它们已经濒于灭绝。‎ was discovered是一般过去时的被动语态，discover“发现”，近义词为find和invent。‎ discover, invent与find ‎◎discover指发现过去所不知道的东西，新奇或意外的东西。‎ Coal was first discovered and used in China.‎ 中国首先发现并使用了煤。‎ Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October, 1492.‎ ‎1492年10月12日，哥伦布发现了美洲。‎ ‎◎invent意为“发明”，即创造出以前从未存在过的东西。‎ Edison invented the electric lamp.爱迪生发明了电灯。‎ Radio had just been invented then.那时无线电刚刚发明出来。‎ ‎◎find意为“找到”，侧重于找到过去丢失的人或物，但有时也表示凭经验或偶然发现了一种东西。‎ Today, corn is found all over the world.今天，全世界都有了玉米。‎ She found him a very good pupil.她发现他是个非常好的学生。‎ ‎◎有时find和discover可以互相替代，意思相同。‎ His notebook was found/discovered in the desk.‎ 他的笔记本是在课桌里找到的。‎ ‎2. Some of the swamps have become polluted. (P119)一些沼泽地受到了污染。‎ have become polluted 中的become是连系动词，polluted是过去分词。这种“系动词+过去分词”结构，意思上也接近被动语态。‎ The slodier got wounded(接近were wounded)in the battle.‎ 这几名战士在这场战斗中受了伤。‎ A few minutes later, the ground became/was covered with snow.‎ 几分钟后地上尽是雪。‎ ‎3. They provide homes for many endangered animals... (P120)他们为许多濒临灭绝的动物提供家园……‎ provide是及物动词，意为“提供”，“供给”。表示“提供……人……物件”是provide...with...；“提供……给……人”是provide...for...。‎ The school provides us with all the materials we need.‎ 学校提供我们所需要的一切资料。‎ We are provided with everything we need for work.‎ 我们被提供了工作所需要的一切。‎ The school provides all the books we need for us.‎ 学校为我们提供我们需要的书籍。‎ ‎◎ provide for是“供养”的意思。‎ He has a large family to provide for. 他要养活一个大家庭。‎ ‎4. ...and help to educate the public about caring for them. (P120)……并且帮助教育公众关爱它们。‎ care for表示“喜欢”，“关心”之意，后接名词或v-ing形式作宾语，take care of也有这个意思。‎ He cared nothing for skating. 他对滑冰没有兴趣。‎ In our class, we care for each other. 在我们班上，我们相互关心。‎ Maria takes good care of everybody. 玛丽亚很关心大家。‎ care for还可以表示“照顾”，“照料”，相当于take care of或look after。‎ At night he fed and cared for the cattle. 夜里他照料牲口，给牲口喂食。‎ You must care for yourselves.‎ ‎=You must look after yourselves.‎ 你们要照顾好自己。‎ The children are well cared for in the nurseries.‎ ‎=The children are taken good care of in the nurseries.‎ 孩子们在托儿所受到很好的照顾。‎ ‎5. turn off the shower while you are washing your hair. (P121)洗头的时候关掉淋浴。‎ ‎（1）turn off表示“关掉”，用在关掉收音机，煤气，自来水等场合。与其相关的几个短语是turn on“打开”，turn down“关小”，turn up“开大”。‎ ‎（2）句中while与when是同义词，都可以用从属连词，引导状语从句表示时间，意思都是“当（在）……的时候”，但二者之间是有区别的。‎ while与when的用法 ‎◎ when的含义是at or during the time that,既可用于指一点时间（从句的谓语动词需用终止性动词），也可用于指一段时间（从句的谓语动词用延续性动词），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动作或状态能同时发生，或一先一后发生。‎ He wants to help people when they are ill.‎ 他想在人们生病的时候帮助他们。‎ When he got to Shanghai, the ship had already set off.‎ 他到达上海时，轮船已经开走了。‎ ‎◎ while的含义是during the time that,只能用于指一段时间（从句的谓语动词必须是延续性的），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动作只能同时发生，不能一先一后发生。‎ While I was reading, my mother was washing clothes.‎ 我读书时，妈妈在洗衣服。‎ ‎◎这两个词还可以用作并列连词。when表示“在那时”或“这时突然”，相当于and just at that time的意思，用来连接两个并列分句，有时when分句之前有逗号把前后两个分句分开。‎ I stayed till sunset, when it began to rain.‎ 我一直呆到太阳下山，这时天开始下雨了。‎ ‎◎ while意为“而”，“却”，表示对照关系。‎ Some like collecting stamps, while others like planting flowers.‎ 有些人喜欢集邮，而有些人却喜欢种花。‎ ‎6. You have probably never heard of Amy Winterbourne. (P122) 你可能从来没有听说过Amy Winterbourne。‎ ‎【知识归纳】hear, hear from, hear of与hear that clause的用法：‎ ‎（1）hear单独使用表示“听见”，“听到”，常用的结构有：‎ ‎◎ hear sb/sth“听到某人或某物的声音”。‎ I can’t hear you at all. 我根本就听不到你的声音。‎ Haven’t you heard anything? 难道你没有听到什么声音？‎ ‎◎ hear sb do sth“听到某人做某事”。‎ I often hear Li Ping read English in the morning.‎ 我经常在早晨听到李平读英语。‎ ‎◎ hear sb doing sth“听到某人正在做某事”。‎ I heard him singing in the next room.我听见他正在隔壁房间里唱歌。‎ 特别提示 hear sb do sth指听到整个行动或整个事件；而hear sb doing sth是指听到了行动的一部分，有正在发生的意思。试比较：‎ I heard the boy go down the stairs.我听到这个男孩走下楼去。‎ I heard the boy going down the stairs我听到这个男孩下楼的声音。‎ ‎（2）hear from意为“收到……的信”；“得到……消息”。‎ How often do you hear from your father? 你每隔多久收到你父亲的信？‎ Have you still not heard from him? 你还没有收到他的信吗？‎ I haven’t heard from him since he telephoned.‎ 自从他打电话以来，我一直没有他的消息。‎ 特别提示 hear from的宾语是表示人的名词或代词，而不是表示信件的名词。‎ 纠错：‎ 我们好几个星期未收到他的信了。‎ 误：We haven’t heard from his letter for weeks.‎ 正：We haven’t heard from him for weeks.‎ 正：We haven’t got a letter from him for weeks.‎ ‎（3）hear of意为“听说”，后面接名词，代词或动名词。‎ I’ve never heard of that before.我以前从未听说过那件事。‎ She disappeared and was never heard of again. ‎ 她不知去向了，再未听到她的消息。‎ ‎（4）hear接从句，是“听说”的意思。‎ One day, the Smiths heard that there was a good doctor in a town not far away.‎ 一天，史密斯一家听说不远的镇里有一位好医生。‎ I hear that one of the pandas has a baby.‎ 我听说其中一只熊猫生了个熊猫宝宝。‎ ‎7. She is a most unusual woman. (P122)她是一个十分不寻常的女性。‎ ‎【知识归纳】a most, the most与most的用法 ‎（1）a most的用法。在“a most+形容词+名词”结构中，most是副词，意为“很，非常”，相当于very,用来修饰它后面的形容词，本句就是这一用法。‎ Guilin is a most beautiful city.桂林是座非常美丽的城市。‎ This is a most interesting story.这是一个非常有趣的故事。‎ ‎（2）the most 的用法 ‎◎在“the most+形容词+名词”结构中,most 是副词，表示程度，意为“最”，与其后的形容词一起构成形容词的最高级。‎ He is one of the most famous writers in China. 他是中国最著名的作家之一。‎ This is the most difficult (one) of the three. 这是这三者中最难的。‎ ‎◎在“动词+the most”结构中，most 也是副词，其作用和意思是“最”其位置通常在动词后。‎ They like English the most. 他们最喜欢英语。‎ ‎（3）most 通常有三种用法 ‎◎在“most+副词或形容词”结构中，most 是副词，意为“很，非常，十分”。‎ I shall most certainly go there. 我十分肯定会到那里去。‎ ‎◎在“most+名词”结构中，most 是形容词，意为“大部分的，大多数”或“最多的”。‎ Most students like English. 大多数学生喜欢英语。‎ Who has (the) most books among you?你们中谁的书最多？‎ ‎8. The walls are made from old glass bottles that are glued together. (P122) 墙是由旧玻璃瓶粘在一起建成的。‎ be made from/of意为“由……（原料）制成”，后面一般接物质名词。接from则表示某物品制成后，已看不出原材料是什么，原材料在制作过程中已起了化学变化；接of表示某物品制成后，仍可看得出原材料，其原料在制作过程中仅起了物理变化。‎ Nylon is made from air, coal and water.尼龙是由空气，煤和水加工制成的。‎ Wine is made from grapes. 葡萄酒是由葡萄制成的。‎ The desk is made of wood. 这桌子是由木头做的。‎ The shoes are made of cloth.这鞋子是用布做的。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎ be made up of表示某物或某组织由一种种成分或一个个成员组成。‎ The world is made up of matter.世界是由物质构成的。‎ A TV set is made up of hundreds of different parts.‎ 电视机是由数百个不同的零件组装成的。‎ ‎◎ be made into意为“把……做成……”，主语在意义上为原材料，介词宾语在意义上为制成品。‎ Bamboo is also made into paper.竹子也可以用来造纸。‎ ‎◎be made in意思是“在……（地点）制造”，介词in后接产地。‎ This kind of computer is made in the USA．这种电脑是美国制造的。‎ This printing machine was made in Beijing.这台印刷机是北京生产的。‎ ‎◎be made by意思是“由……制造”，介词by后跟动作的执行者。‎ This model ship is made by Uncle Wang. 这个轮船模型是由王叔叔制作的。‎ ‎9. Amy recently won an award from the Help Save Our Planet Society. (P122)艾米最近获得了“救助地球”协会的奖励。‎ ‎（1）recently 表示“最近”，既可以用于表示一段时间，也可以表示一点时间，多用于完成时态。‎ Have you hear from Michael recently?你最近接到迈克尔的来信吗？‎ Recently he has made quite a few mistakes. 最近他出了不少错。‎ ‎（2）won a award中award是 “奖”的意思，相关词语有prize，reward和scholarship，这几个词都与“奖”有关。‎ ‎（3）句中的win表示“赢”奖的意思。‎ At the national amateur song-writing contest, he won a first-class award.‎ 在全国业余作曲比赛中，他获得了一等奖。‎ win可表示“赢得比赛，战斗”等，宾语一般是比赛，竞赛，战争等名词，与beat近义。‎ 知识拓展 win与beat的用法 两者在表示“赢”，“胜”的意思时，后面所接的宾语有所不同。“赢比赛或一场战斗”用win；“赢某人”是beat。‎ ‎ We won the match months ago. 几个月前，我们赢得那场比赛。‎ Which side won the battle? 这一战谁打胜了？‎ But still we weren’t sure we could beat them.‎ 但是我们还不能肯定我们能打赢他们。‎ Dick beat John and won the game. 狄克打败了约翰，赢得了比赛。‎ PEP九年级英语知识点归纳 Unit 1 How can we become good learners?‎ 重点：1. 学习并掌握用how来询问做某事的方式；2. 学习并掌握by+ving来表达做某事的方法。‎ 难点：动名词在句中充当的成分。‎ 知识点：‎ ask for help 寻求帮助 work with sb. 和……一起工作 have conversation with 和……一起对话 main idea 中心思想 the secret to ……的秘诀 word by word 逐字 take time 花时间 word group 词组 body language 肢体语言 expressions on faces 脸上的表情 key words 关键词 as well 也 look up 查看 take notes 记笔记 practice doing sth. 练习做某事 pen pal 笔友 keep a diary 记日记 make mistakes 犯错 increase 增加；提高 decrease 减少；降低 practice with sb. 和……一起练习 depend on 依赖 whether or not 是否 pay attention to sth. / doing sth. 注意某事/做某事 for a long time 很长一段时间 connect … with … 把……和……连接起来 write down 写下 mind map 思维导图 lifelong journey 终身的旅程 on one’s own 独自地 bit by bit 一点点 at once 马上，立刻 It’s a piece of cake. 小菜一碟。‎ It serves you right. 你活该。‎ Use it or lose it. ‎ Practice makes perfect.‎ Unit 2 I think that mooncakes are delicious!‎ 重点&难点：1. that, if whether 引导的宾语从句；2. 感叹句的学习和运用。‎ 知识点：‎ Dragon Boat Festival 端午节 Spring Festival 春节 Lantern Festival 元宵节 eat out 吃光 put on 增肥 end up 最终成为 wash away bad things 洗去灾祸 good luck 好运 in the shape of 以……的形式 traditional folk stories 传统民间故事 shot down 击落，打垮 fly up to 飞向 call out one’s name 喊出某人的名字 lay out 展示，安排 share … with sb. 和某人分享……‎ It is a good idea to do sth. 做某事是个好主意 do … instead 做某事来代替 play a trick on 开……的玩笑 dress up 打扮 haunted house 鬼屋 think of 思考，考虑 warn sb, to do sth. 警告某人做某事 remind sb. of sth. 使某人想起某事 promise to do sth. 承诺做某事 in need 有需要 treat sb. with sth. 用……招待某人 give birth to 产生，造成，生孩子 not only … but also … 不仅……而且……‎ just like 就像，正如 感叹句：What+（a/an）+ adj.+名词（+主语+谓语+其他）！‎ ‎ How +adj. / adv. +主语+谓语+其他！ ‎ Unit 3 Could you please tell me where the restroom are?‎ 重点：学习并掌握wh- & how所引导的宾语从句。‎ 难点：运用宾语从句礼貌地寻求帮助。‎ 知识点：‎ excuse me 打扰了 go along 进行，支持 beside 在……旁边 besides 除此之外 turn left / right 左/右转 go past 经过 start with 由……开始 hold one’s hand 拉某人的手 do + 动词原形 表强调 直陈式语句 at that time 在那个时候 pardon me 对不起；请再说一遍 mail a letter 寄一封信 suggest sb. (should) do sth. 建议某人做某事 That is because 那是因为 lead into 导入 on time 准时 I would like thank you for …‎ I’m looking forward to you reply.‎ Unit 4 I used to be afraid of the dark.‎ 重点&难点：1. 学习并掌握used to do句型；2. 学会用used to do句型描述自己或他人过去常常做的事情。‎ 知识点：‎ used to do 过去常常做 adj. + enough 足够……的 from time to time 时常，有时 such a 多么 ‎ do（动词原形）‎ see sb. ‎ ‎ doing（正在进行）‎ get good scores on exams 在测试中取得好成绩 wear glasses 戴眼镜 take up sth. 开始做某事 dare to do sth. 敢于做某事 tons of attention 很多关注 private time 私人时间 the road to success 成功之路 fight on 继续斗争 make it to the top 成就大事业 curly hair 卷发 a book on + 内容 一本关于……的书 do well in = be good at 擅长于 be absent from 缺席……‎ boarding school 寄宿学校 in person 亲自 advise sb. to do sth. 建议某人做某事 take pride in = be proud of 为……感到自豪 self-introduction 自我介绍 Unit 5 What are the shirts made of?‎ 重点：1. 学习并掌握被动语态的用法和句子结构；2. 用英语描述和询问物品的制作材料。‎ 难点：被动语态的用法和句子结构的理解和运用。‎ 知识点：‎ be made of 由……制成（可看出原材料）‎ be made from 由……制成（不可看出原材料）‎ be made in 在……制作 be known for 以……闻名 as far as I know 正如我所知 no matter 无论 no matter how = however no matter what = whatever no matter when = whenever no matter where = wherever ‎ sb. find it（形式宾语）+ adj. + to do sth. / that从句 avoid doing sth. 避免做某事 high-technology product 高科技产品 traffic accident 交通事故 turn … into … 把……转变为……‎ send out 放出 in trouble 困境中 rise into 上升，上涨 hot-air balloons 热气球 sky lanterns 孔明灯 ‎ paper cutting 剪纸 be shaped by 由……塑造 be covered with 由……覆盖 at midnight 在午夜 Unit 6 When was it invented?‎ 重点：1. 学习并掌握被动语态的一般过去时态；2. 学会询问发明时间和用途。‎ 难点：运用被动语态的一般过去时态来讨论发明时间和用途。‎ 知识点：‎ It’s my pleasure. = My pleasure. 我的荣幸。‎ have a point 有道理 by accident 偶然地 It is said that 据说 It is believed that 人们相信 open fire 篝火 remain for some time 保留一段时间 take place 发生 without doubt 不疑有他 drop into 落入 advise sb. not to do sth. 建议某人不要做某事 be similar to 与……相似 in history 在历史上 divide … into … 把……分成……‎ at the same time 与此同时 stop sb. from doing sth. 阻止某人做某事 dream of doing sth. 梦想做某事 not only … but also … 不仅……而且……‎ look up to sb. 敬佩某人 achieve dreams 实现梦想 Don't mention it.不客气，不用谢 translate...into....把…翻译成…‎ Unit 7 Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes.‎ 重点：被动语态的学习和运用。‎ 难点；should + be + pp. + to do sth. 这一结构的学习和运用 知识点：‎ driver’s license 驾驶证 No way! 没门！‎ I don’t think that …‎ part-time job 兼职 get one’s ears pierced 打耳洞 get / have / make sth. done 使某物被……‎ spend time with sb. 花时间和某人在一起 school trip 学校组织的旅行 allow sb. (not) to do sth.‎ sing to sb. 对某人唱歌 by one’s side 在某人身边 run through 穿越 give sb. a hug 给某人一个拥抱 lift sb. up 举起某人 talk back 回嘴 awful dream 噩梦 by + 时间点 到……为止，在……之前 be late for 迟到 regret doing sth. 后悔做某事 keep sb. (away) from sth. 使某人远离某物 give sb. a chance to do sth. 给某人一个机会做某事 move out 搬出去 take test 参加考试 pass test 通过考试 fail test 没通过考试 get in the way of 妨碍……‎ have nothing against with sth. / doing sth. 不反对某事/做某事 end up with 以…结束 end up as 最终成为 be serious about sth. 认真对待某事 make a choice 做选择 Unit 8 It must belong to Carla.‎ 重点：1. 学习并掌握情态动词must, might, can’t, could表推测；2. 学会描述表示物品所属的问答。‎ 难点：学习并掌握情态动词must, might, can’t, could表推测。‎ 知识点：‎ belong to 属于 at the picnic 在野餐时 attend a concert 参加音乐会 in the music hall 在音乐厅 go to a picnic 去野餐 pick sth. up 捡起 nothing much 没什么 run away 逃走 in the neighborhood在社区 have no idea = don’t know 不知道 noise-maker 噪音制造者 make noise 制造噪音 catch a bus 赶公交 wear a suit 穿套装 on the longest day of the year 在一年最长的那天 point out 指出 in a certain way 以某种确定的方式 move up 上升 a burial place 墓地 honor ancestor 祭拜祖先 a group of 一组……‎ perhaps 也许 shine directly into… 直接照进……‎ rock music 摇滚乐 at work 上班 running shoes 跑鞋 表推测（语气从强到弱）：must, may, might, could（一般用于疑问句或否定句）‎ Unit 9 I like music that I can dance to.‎ 重点&难点：学习并掌握关系代词that / who引导的定语从句。‎ 知识点：‎ dance to (music) 随着（音乐）跳舞 sing along with 随着……一起唱 prefer A to B 比起B更喜欢A prefer doing A to doing B ‎ prefer to do sth. rather than do sth.‎ electronic music 电子音乐 be supposed to do sth. 应该做某事 suppose sb. to do sth. 猜想某人做某事 spare time 空闲时间 in one’s spare time 在某人空闲的时候 spare time to do sth. 抽空做某事 smooth music 悦耳的音乐 in that case 既然那样 World War Ⅱ 二战 feel like doing sth. 想要做某事 stick to 坚持 ‎ cheer sb. up 使某人振奋起来 try one’s best 尽某人最大能力 solve problems 解决问题 a good way to do sth. 做某事的好方法 plenty of 大量 Spider-Man 蜘蛛侠 in time 及时 shut off 关闭 folk music 民俗乐 pieces of music 几首曲子 be born in 出生在……‎ by age 17 到17岁的时候 be known for 因……而出名 continue to do sth. 继续做某事 by the end of 到……为止 It is a pity that 遗憾的是 recall sb. from sth. 从……召回某人（的记忆）‎ in total 总共 touch the hearts 触动心灵 for this reason 出于这个原因 Unit 10 You’re supposed to shake hands.‎ 重点：学习并掌握be supposed to, be expected to和be important to的用法。‎ 难点：培养学生跨文化交流意识。‎ 知识点：‎ be supposed to do sth. 应该做某事 be expected to do sth. 应该/被期望做某事 be important to do sth. 做某事是重要的 shake hands 握手 bow to sb. 向某人鞠躬 hold out one’s hand 伸出某人的手 greet each other 互相问候 on both side of my face 在我的两颊上 be relax about 对……放松 rush around 东奔西跑 value the time 珍惜时间 walk around 四处走动 as many as sb. can = as many as possible 尽可能多的 make an effort to do sth. 努力做某事 keep sb. waiting 让某人一直等候 It’s no big deal! 没什么大不了的！‎ go abroad 出国 at home 在国内 clean … off 把……擦掉 take off 脱下；起飞 be worth doing sth. 值得做某事 table manner 餐桌礼仪 stick … into … 把……插进……‎ go out of one’s way (to do sth.) 特地做某事…, 格外努力做…‎ make sb. feel at home 使某人感到宾至如归 be comfortable doing sth. 轻松地做某事 cut it up 把它切开 be gradually doing sth. 逐渐做某事 go out of one’s way 特地，不怕麻烦 show up 出席，露面 Best wishes. 祝好运。‎ Unit 11 Sad movies make me cry.‎ 重点&难点：学习并掌握make + sb. + v.原形 / adj. 的结构和用法。‎ 知识点：‎ would rather do 宁愿做某事 would rather do sth. than do sth. 宁愿做某事而不做某事 quiet music 轻音乐 have fun with sb. 和某人一起度过愉快时光 get to know 了解，认识 join sb. 加入某人，与某人结伴 each time 每次 left out 忽视 a long time ago 很久以前 pale as chalk 像粉笔一样苍白 cry for 因……而哭 call in 召集 neither … nor … 不……也不……‎ take one’s position 取代某人的位置 hand back 交回 throw rubbish 扔垃圾 return to 返回 keep one’s eyes on the ground 一直盯着地板看 on one’s shoulder 在某人肩膀上 kick sb. off 把某人踢掉 miss doing sth. 错过做某事 knock on door 敲门 be hard on sb. 对某人苛刻 pull together 齐心协力 nod in agreement 点头同意 offer advice 提建议 Unit 12 Life is full of the unexpected.‎ 重点&难点：学习并掌握过去完成时。‎ 知识点：‎ by the time 到……时候 get in the shower 在淋浴 go off （闹钟）响 rush out of 奔出 brush one’s teeth 刷牙 give a lift 让……搭车 be about to do 即将做某事 east from 在……的东边 wait in line 排队等候 in disbelief 难以置信的 jump out of 跳出 take off 起飞 hear about 听说 turn into 变成 by the end of 到……为止 a costume party 一个化装舞会 take place 发生 play trick / joke on sb. 开某人玩笑 April Fool’s Day be sold out 卖光 lose weight 减肥 end up doing sth. 以……结束 land on 着陆 move across 跨越 spread across 传遍，席卷 as + doing ‎ turn around 转身 go inside 进去 hand in 上交 Unit 13 We’re trying to save the earth!（复习课）‎ 重点&难点：现在进行时、used to do句型、被动语态、现在完成时和情态动词的复习和巩固。‎ 知识点：‎ noise pollution 噪音污染 air pollution 空气污染 water pollution 水污染 the bottom of ……的底部 throw … into … 把……扔进……‎ play a part in doing sth. 在……中起作用 cut down 砍到 take the bus = by bus ‎ waste pollution 垃圾污染 takeaway food 外卖食品 make a difference 有影响 hear of 听说 shark fin 鱼翅 cut off 切下 no longer 不再 at the top of 在……顶端 food chain 食物链 fall by over 90 percent 下降超过90%‎ in the last … ys 在过去的……年里 so far 迄今为止 be good for 对……有好处 ocean’s ecosystem 海洋生态系统 Clean-Up Day 清洁日 afford to 有条件做某事 take action 采取行动 turn off 关闭 pay for 购买……‎ instead of 取代 paper napkins 餐巾纸 put to good use 施展 build … out of 用……建造……‎ pull down 摧毁；推翻 upside down 颠倒 win a prize 获奖 set up 建立 set up website 建立一个网站 set up a business 开业 Not only can …，but it also … 半倒装句 Unit 14 I remember meeting all of you in Grade 7.（复习课）‎ 重点&难点：利用所学知识描述过去事件。‎ 知识点：‎ remember doing sth. 记得做过某事 do survey 做调查 help sb. with sth. 帮助某人某事 score two goals 踢进两个球 in a row 连续 take a break from doing sth. 暂时停止做某事 teaching methods 教学方法 be patient with 对……耐心 work out 解决 guide sb. to do sth. 引导某人做某事 take time to do sth. 花费时间做某事 put in more effort 投入更多努力 look back 回看 keep one’s cool 保持冷静 train for 为……训练 be better at sth.‎ have problems with 有……问题 the end of the year 年底 first of all 首先 thirsty of knowledge 渴望知识 none of （三个或三个以上）都不 mean to sb. 对某人重要 fail to do sth. 未能做某事 ahead of 在……之前 along the way 沿路 learn from along with 与……一道 in a few years’ time 几年后 on journey 旅途中 separate from 分离 be responsible for 对……负责